Ecclesia triumphans: that is, The ioy of the English church for the happie coronation of the most vertuous and pious prince, Iames by the grace of God, King of England, Scotland, France, and Ireland, defendour of the faith, &c. and for the ioyfull continuance of religion and peace by the same. With a briefe exposition of the 122. Psalme, and fit application to the time: wherein are declared the manifold benefits like to grow by these good beginnings to the church and common-wealth of England. Dedicated to the most gratious ladie and vertuous princess, Ioland Anne, by the grace of God, Queene of England, Scotland, France, &c.
         Willet, Andrew, 1562-1621.
      
       
         
           1603
        
      
       Approx. 191 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 76 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2005-03 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A15398
         STC 25676
         ESTC S114434
         99849659
         99849659
         14820
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A15398)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 14820)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 1536:05)
      
       
         
           
             Ecclesia triumphans: that is, The ioy of the English church for the happie coronation of the most vertuous and pious prince, Iames by the grace of God, King of England, Scotland, France, and Ireland, defendour of the faith, &c. and for the ioyfull continuance of religion and peace by the same. With a briefe exposition of the 122. Psalme, and fit application to the time: wherein are declared the manifold benefits like to grow by these good beginnings to the church and common-wealth of England. Dedicated to the most gratious ladie and vertuous princess, Ioland Anne, by the grace of God, Queene of England, Scotland, France, &c.
             Willet, Andrew, 1562-1621.
          
           [28], 121, [1] p.
           
             Printed by Iohn Legat, Printer to the Vniuersitie of Cambridge. 1603. And are to be sold in Pauls Churchyard at the signe of the Crowne by Simon Waterson [London,
             [Cambridge] :
             1603]
          
           
             Dedication signed: Andrew Willet.
             Booksellers's address from STC.
             Errata on I1v, final leaf.
             Reproduction of the original in the Bodleian Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Catholic Church -- Controversial literature -- Early works to 1800.
           Bible. -- O.T -- Psalms CXXII -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
           Bible. -- N.T -- John XVII -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
           Bible. -- N.T -- Jude -- Commentaries -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2004-10 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2004-10 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2004-11 Mona Logarbo
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2004-11 Mona Logarbo
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2005-01 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           
             ECCLESIA
             TRIVMPHANS
             :
          
           that
           is
           ,
           THE
           IOY
           OF
           THE
           ENGLISH
           CHVRCH
           ,
           FOR
           THE
           happie
           Coronation
           of
           the
           most
           vertuous
           and
           
             pious
             Prince
             ,
             IAMES
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             King
          
           of
           England
           ,
           Scotland
           ,
           France
           ,
           and
           Ireland
           ,
           
             defendour
             of
             the
             faith
             ,
             &c.
             and
             for
             the
          
           ioyfull
           continuance
           of
           religigion
           
             and
             peace
             by
             the
          
           same
           .
        
         
           With
           a
           briefe
           Exposition
           of
           the
           122.
           
           Psalme
           ,
           and
           fit
           application
           to
           the
           time
           ;
           wherein
           are
           declared
           the
           manifold
           benefits
           like
           to
           grow
           by
           these
           good
           beginnings
           to
           the
           Church
           and
           Common-wealth
           of
           England
           .
        
         
           Dedicated
           to
           the
           most
           gratious
           Ladie
           and
           vertuous
           
             Princesse
             ,
          
           Ioland
           Anna
           ,
           
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
          
           Queene
           of
           England
           ,
           Scotland
           ,
           
             France
             ,
             &c.
             
          
        
         
           Prov.
           28.
           2.
           
        
         
           When
           the
           righteous
           are
           in
           authoritie
           ,
           the
           people
           reioyce
           .
        
         
           Psal.
           118.
           23.
           
        
         
           This
           was
           the
           Lords
           doing
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           maruelous
           in
           our
           eyes
           .
           
             v.
          
           24.
           
           This
           is
           the
           day
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           made
           ,
           let
           vs
           reioyce
           and
           be
           glad
           in
           it
           .
        
         
           PRINTED
           BY
           IOHN
           LEGAT
           ,
           Printer
           to
           the
           Vniuersitie
           of
           
             Cambridge
             .
          
           1603.
           
        
         
           And
           are
           to
           be
           sold
           in
           Pauls
           Churchyard
           at
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           Crowne
           by
           
             Simon
             Waterson
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
         
           To
           the
           most
           noble
           and
           vertuous
           Princesse
           ,
           the
           Ladie
           ANNA
           ,
           by
           the
           grace
           of
           God
           Queene
           of
           England
           ,
           Scotland
           ,
           France
           ,
           and
           Ireland
           :
           A.
           W.
           wisheth
           all
           spirituall
           comforts
           and
           encrease
           of
           honour
           in
           this
           life
           ,
           and
           euerlasting
           ioy
           in
           the
           next
           .
        
         
           MOst
           gracious
           Ladie
           ,
           and
           noble
           Princesse
           )
           whē
           Zerubbabel
           that
           faithfull
           prince
           of
           Iuda
           beganne
           to
           build
           the
           temple
           ,
           with
           the
           stone
           of
           tinne
           in
           his
           hand
           ,
           
           the
           people
           reioyced
           :
           but
           when
           he
           had
           finished
           the
           worke
           ,
           and
           brought
           forth
           the
           head
           and
           chiefe
           stone
           thereof
           ,
           then
           shoutings
           vvere
           heard
           ,
           of
           those
           that
           cried
           ,
           
             grace
             ,
          
           
           
             grace
             vnto
             it
             .
          
           If
           then
           the
           people
           of
           God
           in
           this
           kingdome
           had
           great
           cause
           to
           reioyce
           ,
           when
           religion
           began
           first
           to
           be
           planted
           ,
           and
           the
           spirituall
           building
           of
           the
           Church
           to
           be
           reared
           ,
           much
           greater
           ought
           our
           ioy
           now
           to
           be
           ,
           when
           we
           see
           religion
           continued
           ,
           and
           hope
           ,
           if
           any
           thing
           yet
           be
           wanting
           ,
           that
           the
           same
           in
           good
           time
           may
           be
           perfited
           .
        
         
           Others
           will
           striue
           diuersly
           to
           expresse
           the
           ioy
           of
           this
           happie
           day
           ,
           and
           to
           solemnize
           the
           
           entrance
           and
           initiation
           of
           so
           religious
           and
           much
           desired
           raigne
           of
           your
           Highnes
           louing
           lord
           and
           our
           gracious
           Soueraigne
           :
           some
           by
           pleasant
           pageants
           and
           shewes
           ,
           some
           by
           valiant
           and
           martiall
           feates
           of
           armes
           and
           iustings
           ,
           some
           by
           rich
           and
           costly
           presents
           and
           gifts
           :
           but
           we
           among
           the
           rest
           ,
           the
           Ministers
           of
           the
           Gospell
           of
           Christ
           ,
           both
           by
           preaching
           and
           setting
           forth
           the
           great
           mercies
           of
           God
           towards
           vs
           ,
           and
           by
           writing
           to
           conserue
           a
           perpetuall
           memorie
           thereof
           ,
           will
           consecrate
           our
           tongues
           and
           pennes
           to
           this
           seruice
           :
           that
           we
           may
           say
           with
           the
           kingly
           prophet
           Dauid
           ,
           
             My
             tongue
             is
             the
             penne
             of
             a
             readie
             writer
             ,
          
           
           
             I
             will
             entreat
             in
             my
             works
             of
             the
             king
             .
          
        
         
           Your
           Grace
           hath
           great
           reason
           to
           be
           glad
           of
           this
           day
           ,
           whose
           honour
           able
           estate
           is
           thereby
           enlarged
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           rule
           of
           the
           law
           ,
           
             Mulier
             marito
             concrescit
             ▪
          
           
           
             the
             ladie
             encreaseth
             with
             her
             lord
             :
          
           your
           royall
           issue
           and
           princely
           heire
           reioyceth
           ,
           whose
           noble
           title
           of
           inheritance
           is
           augmented
           :
           your
           Highnesse
           faithfull
           seruants
           and
           domesticalls
           haue
           not
           the
           least
           part
           in
           this
           common
           ioy
           ,
           whose
           true
           and
           diligent
           seruice
           ,
           is
           like
           to
           be
           highly
           recompenced
           .
           But
           all
           these
           ioyes
           ,
           which
           particularly
           in
           any
           of
           these
           may
           be
           singled
           ,
           in
           the
           Church
           and
           commonwealth
           of
           England
           doe
           all
           concurre
           and
           are
           not
           onely
           dubbled
           ,
           but
           multiplied
           .
           
           God
           ,
           hath
           giuen
           in
           his
           mercie
           to
           vs
           ,
           both
           a
           comfortable
           husband
           to
           his
           ▪
           Church
           ,
           a
           carefull
           parent
           to
           the
           Commonwealth
           ,
           an
           honourable
           Master
           ▪
           to
           all
           honest
           and
           louing
           subiects
           .
           The
           first
           shall
           haue
           (
           we
           trust
           )
           ioyfull
           experience
           of
           his
           Christian
           pietie
           ,
           the
           second
           of
           his
           fatherly
           benignitie
           ,
           the
           third
           of
           his
           princely
           equitie
           :
           that
           both
           Church
           may
           say
           with
           the
           spouse
           in
           the
           Canticles
           .
           
           
             We
             will
             remember
             thy
             loue
             more
             then
             wine
             ;
          
           and
           the
           Commonwealth
           as
           the
           Prophet
           of
           Eliakim
           ,
           
           
             he
             shall
             be
             a
             father
             to
             the
             inhabitants
             of
             Ierusalē
             ;
          
           and
           ▪
           be
           whole
           realme
           ,
           as
           the
           same
           prophet
           saith
           ,
           
             he
             shall
             be
             called
             a
             repairer
             of
             the
             breach
             ,
          
           
           
             and
             a
             restorer
             of
             the
             decaied
             pathes
             .
          
        
         
           And
           now
           most
           noble
           Queene
           ,
           seeing
           God
           hath
           aduanced
           your
           H.
           to
           this
           great
           honour
           ,
           honour
           him
           againe
           that
           hath
           honoured
           you
           .
           Forget
           not
           him
           that
           hath
           remembred
           you
           ,
           and
           serue
           him
           faithfully
           ,
           that
           hath
           preuented
           you
           with
           blessings
           liberally
           .
           Two
           Annaes
           are
           famous
           in
           scripture
           :
           
           Anna
           of
           Elkanah
           for
           her
           godly
           posteritie
           in
           Samuel
           ,
           Anna
           of
           Phanuel
           for
           her
           deuout
           pietie
           in
           praying
           in
           the
           temple
           .
           
           Elka●ab
           ,
           whose
           wife
           the
           first
           Anna
           was
           ,
           signifieth
           ,
           the
           possession
           of
           God
           :
           Phanuel
           ,
           whose
           daughter
           the
           second
           was
           ,
           is
           as
           much
           to
           say
           ,
           the
           sight
           of
           God.
           Anna
           also
           is
           interpreted
           ,
           gratious
           ,
           or
           mercifull
           .
           Answerable
           vnto
           these
           
           names
           were
           the
           effects
           :
           the
           first
           had
           a
           vertuous
           sonne
           Samuel
           ,
           a
           possession
           of
           God
           in
           deede
           :
           the
           second
           saw
           Christ
           in
           the
           temple
           and
           confessed
           him
           :
           and
           both
           of
           them
           were
           vertuous
           women
           .
           God
           graunt
           vnto
           your
           Highnes
           the
           possession
           of
           Elkanah
           ,
           encrease
           of
           spirituall
           sight
           ,
           and
           knowledge
           with
           Phan●els
           daughter
           ,
           and
           to
           be
           a
           right
           Anna
           ,
           both
           to
           fin●
           grace
           with
           God
           ,
           and
           to
           shew
           mercie
           and
           compassion
           to
           men
           .
        
         
           Two
           other
           of
           this
           honourable
           and
           Christian
           name
           ,
           Anna
           ,
           I
           finde
           in
           the
           Chronicles
           of
           this
           nation
           ,
           both
           vertuous
           Queenes
           ,
           your
           Highnes
           worthie
           pr●decessours
           ,
           one
           wife
           to
           Richard
           the
           2.
           sister
           to
           Wincelaus
           king
           of
           Bohemie
           ;
           the
           other
           ,
           ladie
           Anna
           Bullen
           ,
           wife
           to
           king
           Henrie
           the
           8.
           and
           mother
           to
           our
           late
           gratious
           Soueraigne
           Q.
           Elizabeth
           .
           The
           first
           is
           honoured
           for
           her
           studie
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           ;
           who
           had
           in
           those
           blind
           daies
           the
           4.
           
           Euangelists
           in
           English
           ,
           
           and
           the
           doctors
           of
           the
           Church
           vpon
           the
           same
           .
           The
           other
           is
           commended
           for
           her
           excellent
           vertues
           ;
           
           as
           her
           sinceriti●
           in
           true
           religion
           ,
           her
           Christian
           charitie
           and
           princely
           liberalitie
           toward
           the
           poore
           ,
           whose
           almes
           giuen
           that
           way
           in
           three
           quarters
           of
           a
           yeare
           ,
           are
           summed
           to
           be
           13.
           or
           14.
           thousand
           pound
           .
           And
           now
           God
           hath
           sent
           vs
           a
           third
           Queene
           Anna
           ,
           which
           we
           trust
           in
           all
           these
           princely
           vertues
           as
           
           shee
           continueth
           the
           Christian
           name
           ,
           so
           will
           reviue
           the
           honourable
           fame
           of
           these
           vertuous
           matrones
           .
           That
           innocent
           ladie
           Queene
           Anna
           Bullen
           ,
           though
           by
           the
           malice
           of
           her
           aduersaries
           traduced
           ,
           yet
           both
           by
           her
           godly
           death
           ,
           and
           Gods
           blessing
           vpon
           her
           posteritie
           is
           sufficiently
           cleared
           .
           At
           her
           coronation
           these
           verses
           were
           exhibited
           :
           
             
               Regina
               Anna
               ,
               paris
               regis
               de
               semine
               nata
            
             
               Et
               paries
               populis
               aurea
               saecla
               tuis
               .
            
             
               As
               Anna
               Queene
               of
               princely
               race
               doth
               equally
               descend
               ,
            
             
               So
               to
               her
               people
               golden
               daies
               her
               offspring
               shall
               extend
               .
            
          
           These
           propheticall
           verses
           ,
           if
           I
           may
           so
           call
           thē
           ,
           had
           their
           due
           accomplishment
           afterward
           ,
           in
           the
           happie
           issue
           of
           this
           Ladie
           ,
           then
           vnborne
           ,
           Queene
           Elizabeth
           ,
           by
           whome
           indeede
           this
           Church
           of
           England
           enioyed
           a
           golden
           time
           :
           
             such
             as
             the
             like
             (
             as
             his
             Maiestie
             saith
             )
             hath
             not
             been
             read
             nor
             heard
             of
             since
             the
             daies
             of
             the
             Romane
             Emperour
             Augustus
             .
          
           
           And
           it
           is
           the
           comfortable
           hope
           of
           this
           nation
           of
           England
           ,
           tha●
           God
           hath
           raised
           your
           Highnes
           vp
           another
           fruitfull
           Anna
           ,
           by
           whose
           royall
           offspring
           this
           lanà
           may
           long
           haue
           fruition
           of
           like
           golden
           and
           happie
           daies
           ,
           which
           God
           in
           his
           mercie
           graunt
           .
        
         
           The
           Lord
           make
           your
           grace
           ,
           vnto
           his
           Maiestie
           ,
           
           〈◊〉
           D●borah
           to
           Baruch
           ,
           as
           Huldah
           to
           Ios●●●
           ,
           as
           Esther
           to
           〈◊〉
           A●ashuer●sh
           :
           Christ
           Iesus
           graunt
           you
           the
           pietie
           of
           Rebecca
           ,
           that
           consulted
           with
           God
           ,
           the
           zeale
           of
           M●riam
           ,
           that
           praised
           God
           ,
           
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           Teko●●●
           ,
           
           that
           perswaded
           Dauid
           ,
           the
           wisdome
           of
           the
           matron●
           of
           Abel
           that
           deliuered
           the
           citie
           ,
           the
           charitie
           of
           the
           Shunamite
           ,
           
           that
           prouided
           for
           the
           Prophet
           :
           that
           the
           Church
           of
           God●
           beholding
           your
           zeale
           toward
           God
           ,
           your
           〈◊〉
           to
           his
           Chur●●
           ;
           desire
           to
           the
           truth
           ,
           obedience
           〈◊〉
           his
           word
           ,
           humilitie
           in
           your
           high
           estate
           ▪
           mercie
           and
           pietie
           toward
           the
           po●re
           members
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           constancie
           in
           vertue
           and
           all
           goodnes
           ,
           may
           blesse
           you
           with
           the
           saying
           of
           the
           wise
           man
           of
           the
           godly
           matrone
           ;
           
           
             many
             daughters
             haue
             done
             vertuously
             ,
             but
             your
             surmount
             them
             all
             :
          
           and
           that
           you
           may
           be
           eternally
           blessed
           in
           heauen
           ,
           that
           in
           that
           day
           it
           may
           be
           pronounced
           to
           your
           comfort
           ▪
           
           
             Giue
             her
             of
             the
             fruit
             of
             her
             hands
             ,
             &c.
             
          
        
         
           
             Your
             Highnes
             readie
             to
             be
             commanded
             in
             the
             Lord
             ,
             
               Andrew
               Willet
               ,
               Minister
               of
               the
               Gospel
               of
               Christ.
               
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           The
           Preface
           to
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
           THe
           Iewes
           returning
           from
           captiuitie
           ,
           did
           so
           wonder
           at
           their
           strange
           deliuerance
           ,
           that
           they
           seemed
           to
           be
           as
           men
           ,
           
             that
             dreame
             :
          
           Psal.
           126
           1.
           
           As
           strange
           a
           worke
           hath
           God
           wrought
           for
           the
           Church
           of
           Englād
           :
           for
           though
           we
           are
           not
           come
           from
           thraldome
           to
           libertie
           ,
           or
           from
           captiuitie
           to
           our
           owne
           countrie
           ,
           hauing
           many
           yeares
           vnder
           our
           late
           Soueraigne
           enioyed
           both
           true
           religion
           ,
           and
           therewith
           ,
           as
           the
           handmaid
           waiting
           vpon
           her
           mistresse
           ,
           all
           flourishing
           peace
           :
           yet
           in
           respect
           of
           our
           deliuerance
           from
           that
           danger
           to
           the
           state
           ,
           which
           many
           feared
           ,
           the
           change
           of
           religiō
           in
           the
           church
           ,
           which
           some
           doubted
           ,
           others
           desired
           ,
           we
           can
           no
           lesse
           wonder
           at
           the
           Lords
           strange
           worke
           ,
           and
           say
           with
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           :
           
             The
             Lord
             hath
             done
             great
             things
             for
             vs
             ,
             whereof
             we
             reioyce
             ,
          
           Psal.
           126.
           3.
           
        
         
           In
           this
           common
           ioy
           who
           shall
           forbidde
           any
           to
           reioyce
           ?
           and
           where
           Gods
           mercies
           are
           so
           manifest
           and
           euident
           to
           all
           the
           world
           ,
           who
           can
           hold
           his
           peace
           ?
           But
           as
           benefits
           
           are
           not
           acknowledged
           ,
           where
           first
           they
           are
           not
           well
           considered
           ,
           nor
           due
           thankes
           performed
           ,
           where
           the
           grace
           receiued
           is
           not
           worthely
           esteemed
           :
           for
           this
           cause
           haue
           I
           addressed
           this
           short
           treatise
           ,
           that
           Gods
           goodnesse
           to
           Israel
           might
           be
           proclaimed
           ,
           and
           that
           no
           man
           be
           ignorant
           what
           God
           hath
           done
           for
           vs
           ,
           that
           we
           again
           be
           not
           negligent
           to
           doe
           to
           him
           ,
           that
           which
           becommeth
           vs
           ,
           to
           giue
           vnto
           him
           thankes
           and
           praise
           .
        
         
           Samuel
           ,
           to
           disswade
           the
           people
           from
           al
           their
           wanton
           desires
           to
           haue
           a
           king
           ,
           wheras
           God
           was
           yet
           their
           king
           ,
           telleth
           them
           ,
           what
           the
           properties
           of
           their
           king
           shall
           be
           ,
           and
           how
           hardly
           he
           should
           vse
           them
           ,
           and
           how
           little
           pleasing
           vnto
           them
           his
           gouernment
           was
           like
           to
           be
           .
           1.
           
           Sam.
           8.
           
           As
           he
           would
           disswade
           from
           their
           vnthankefulnesse
           to
           God
           in
           that
           headstrong
           request
           ,
           by
           propounding
           vnto
           them
           the
           hard
           conditions
           of
           their
           king
           :
           so
           mine
           intent
           is
           to
           perswade
           to
           thankefulnesse
           to
           God
           ,
           by
           setting
           forth
           the
           princely
           and
           Christian
           endowements
           of
           our
           gratious
           Soueraigne
           ,
           and
           the
           manifold
           benefits
           ,
           which
           both
           Church
           and
           cōmon
           wealth
           are
           sure
           by
           Gods
           grace
           to
           enioy
           vnder
           his
           Maiesties
           godly
           &
           vpright
           regiment
           .
        
         
         
           For
           this
           cause
           haue
           I
           sorted
           out
           this
           122.
           
           Psalme
           ,
           as
           seruing
           most
           fitly
           for
           this
           present
           occasion
           ;
           which
           I
           haue
           deuided
           into
           20.
           seuerall
           meditations
           ,
           shewing
           so
           many
           blessings
           vpon
           this
           Church
           and
           common-wealth
           ,
           answerable
           to
           those
           which
           Israel
           enioyed
           vnder
           Dauid
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           As
           Dauid
           appeased
           the
           strife
           betweene
           him
           and
           the
           house
           of
           Saul
           ,
           
           and
           brought
           all
           Israel
           to
           one
           gouernment
           ,
           which
           was
           before
           deuided
           :
           so
           these
           two
           kingdomes
           of
           England
           and
           Scotland
           hauing
           beene
           long
           at
           variance
           ,
           and
           exercised
           in
           time
           past
           with
           long
           and
           bloodie
           battels
           ,
           
           are
           now
           vnited
           in
           one
           :
           His
           Maiestie
           is
           the
           corner
           stone
           ,
           that
           hath
           conioyned
           these
           two
           walles
           togither
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           Vnder
           Dauid
           true
           religion
           was
           cōtinued
           :
           
           and
           by
           our
           Soueraigne
           the
           faith
           of
           the
           gospell
           by
           his
           Maiestie
           truely
           professed
           ,
           and
           in
           his
           princely
           bookes
           protested
           ,
           shall
           still
           be
           maintained
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           Dauid
           was
           a
           learned
           prince
           ,
           
           an
           inditer
           of
           heauenly
           songs
           and
           sonnets
           :
           And
           God
           hath
           giuen
           vnto
           vs
           a
           wise
           and
           iudiciall
           king
           ,
           whose
           princely
           writings
           do
           giue
           him
           the
           preheminence
           before
           all
           his
           predecessors
           :
           another
           Salomon
           ,
           a
           king
           and
           yet
           an
           Ecclesiastes
           ,
           a
           learned
           writer
           ;
           such
           an
           
           one
           ,
           as
           Gratian
           the
           Emperour
           was
           :
           of
           whome
           Ambrose
           saith
           ,
           
           
             Scripsisti
             tua
             totam
             epistolam
             manu
             ,
             vt
             ipsi
             apices
             fidem
             tuam
             pi●●atemque
             loquerentur
             :
             You
             haue
             written
             (
             not
             an
             epistle
             onely
             )
             but
             whole
             bookes
             with
             your
             hand
             ,
             that
             the
             very
             points
             and
             letters
             doe
             vtter
             your
             faith
             and
             pietie
             .
          
        
         
           4.
           
           In
           Dauids
           time
           there
           was
           free
           accesse
           to
           Gods
           house
           ,
           
           
             I
             reioyced
             when
             they
             said
             ,
             let
             vs
             goe
             vp
             ,
             &c
          
           And
           nowe
           the
           doores
           of
           Protestants
           Churches
           shall
           be
           as
           wide
           set
           open
           as
           euer
           .
        
         
           5.
           
           Then
           the
           faithfull
           one
           exhorted
           an
           other
           saying
           ,
           
           
             Let
             vs
             goe
             vp
             to
             the
             house
             of
             the
             Lord
             :
          
           And
           now
           may
           Christians
           goe
           hand
           in
           hand
           ,
           conferring
           freely
           and
           edifying
           one
           another
           .
        
         
           6.
           
           Dauid
           in
           bringing
           home
           the
           Arke
           ,
           
           went
           before
           himselfe
           ,
           and
           was
           an
           example
           of
           godly
           zeale
           to
           his
           people
           :
           So
           it
           is
           our
           Dauids
           godly
           precept
           to
           his
           princely
           sonne
           ,
           
             Teach
             your
             people
             by
             your
             example
             ,
          
           p.
           24.
           
           And
           such
           is
           the
           practise
           in
           his
           owne
           royall
           person
           giuing
           light
           by
           his
           Christian
           life
           to
           all
           his
           subiects
           .
        
         
           7.
           
           Before
           Dauids
           time
           religion
           was
           vnsetled
           ,
           
           the
           Arke
           was
           flitting
           from
           place
           to
           place
           ,
           but
           he
           brought
           it
           to
           Hierusalem
           ,
           where
           it
           staied
           ;
           and
           therefore
           he
           saith
           ,
           
             Our
             
             feete
             shall
             stand
             in
             thy
             gates
             ,
             O
             Jerusalem
             :
          
           and
           nowe
           whereas
           many
           feared
           an
           alteration
           of
           religion
           at
           the
           next
           change
           ,
           we
           verely
           hope
           ,
           that
           the
           Gospell
           hath
           set
           sure
           footing
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           ,
           which
           both
           by
           his
           Maiestie
           while
           he
           liueth
           ,
           (
           whose
           happie
           raigne
           God
           in
           his
           mercie
           many
           yeares
           prolong
           )
           and
           by
           his
           roiall
           posteritie
           walking
           in
           his
           steppes
           ,
           we
           trust
           shall
           be
           continued
           to
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           :
           wherein
           his
           highnesse
           also
           hath
           deliuered
           his
           sound
           iudgement
           ,
           and
           constant
           resolutiō
           :
           
             That
             in
             the
             last
             estate
          
           (
           when
           the
           church
           is
           deliuered
           from
           the
           thraldome
           of
           Antichrist
           )
           
             without
             any
             more
             generall
             mutations
             ,
          
           
           
             the
             world
             shall
             remaine
             to
             the
             consummation
             and
             end
             of
             the
             same
             .
          
           
        
         
           8.
           
           Vnder
           Dauid
           the
           cittie
           flourished
           ,
           beeing
           enlarged
           with
           goodly
           and
           beautifull
           buildings
           :
           
           
             Ierusalem
             was
             a
             cittie
             well
             compact
             and
             built
             togither
             .
          
           And
           nowe
           also
           we
           hope
           by
           Gods
           mercie
           ,
           that
           men
           shall
           plant
           vineyards
           and
           eate
           the
           fruit
           thereof
           ,
           build
           houses
           ,
           and
           dwell
           in
           them
           .
        
         
           9.
           
           Dauid
           was
           brought
           vp
           to
           Ierusalem
           ,
           with
           the
           ioynt
           consent
           of
           all
           Israel
           ,
           who
           said
           ,
           
           
             we
             are
             thy
             bones
             and
             thy
             flesh
             ,
          
           2.
           
           Sam.
           5.
           1.
           
           And
           it
           is
           admirable
           to
           consider
           the
           generall
           resolution
           of
           all
           English
           people
           ,
           
           and
           the
           coniunction
           of
           their
           hearts
           &
           affections
           ,
           both
           of
           high
           and
           lowe
           ,
           in
           receiuing
           their
           Soueraigne
           .
        
         
           10.
           
           Then
           ,
           the
           tribes
           of
           Israel
           were
           not
           onely
           vnited
           in
           one
           kingdome
           ,
           but
           were
           reconciled
           among
           themselues
           vnited
           also
           in
           one
           religion
           :
           
             thither
             the
             tribes
             went
             vp
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           So
           not
           onely
           externall
           warres
           are
           like
           for
           euer
           to
           cease
           betweene
           these
           two
           nations
           ,
           
           but
           one
           vniforme
           religion
           shall
           hereafter
           containe
           them
           in
           perfect
           loue
           and
           vnitie
           :
           that
           neither
           the
           Church
           of
           Scotland
           shall
           be
           iealous
           of
           the
           English
           Church
           ,
           as
           inclining
           in
           some
           things
           to
           poperie
           ;
           nor
           the
           English
           suspect
           the
           other
           ,
           as
           affecting
           a
           popular
           paritie
           :
           but
           as
           louing
           sisters
           &
           fellow
           tribes
           shall
           hold
           one
           worshippe
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           go
           vp
           to
           Ierusalem
           togither
           .
        
         
           11.
           
           
             Dauid
             expelled
             the
             Iebusites
             ,
             not
             admitting
             contrarie
             religion
             in
             Hierusalem
             :
          
           
           
             And
             it
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             that
             God
             will
             so
             direct
             our
             Dauids
             heart
             ,
             that
             religion
             shall
             be
             sincerely
             professed
             among
             vs
             ,
             without
             any
             mixture
             or
             toleration
             :
             as
             his
             Maiestie
             most
             godly
             professeth
             thus
             ;
          
           Is
           there
           not
           nowe
           a
           sincere
           profession
           of
           the
           truth
           among
           vs
           in
           this
           Isle
           ,
           
           oppugned
           by
           the
           nations
           about
           ,
           haters
           of
           the
           holy
           word
           ?
           and
           doe
           we
           not
           also
           as
           Israel
           professe
           one
           onely
           God
           ruled
           by
           
           his
           pure
           word
           onel
           ?
           yon
           the
           other
           part
           ,
           are
           they
           not
           as
           Philistims
           ,
           
           adorers
           of
           legions
           of
           gods
           ,
           and
           ruled
           by
           the
           foolish
           traditions
           of
           men
           ?
           
             And
             again
             in
             another
             place
             ,
          
           We
           must
           feare
           to
           fall
           from
           the
           trueth
           reuealed
           and
           professed
           by
           vs
           ,
           that
           we
           may
           be
           free
           from
           the
           like
           punishment
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           12.
           
           Dauid
           reformed
           many
           things
           that
           were
           amisse
           in
           Israel
           ,
           he
           appointed
           the
           Leuites
           their
           courses
           and
           seruices
           ,
           that
           were
           farre
           out
           of
           order
           .
           Our
           zealous
           Dauid
           hath
           giuen
           vs
           great
           hope
           of
           the
           like
           ,
           who
           in
           his
           princely
           treatise
           ,
           
           Queene
           Elizabeth
           then
           liuing
           ,
           thus
           writeth
           :
           
             I
             doubt
             nothing
             ,
             yea
             in
             her
             name
             I
             dare
             promise
             ,
             by
             the
             by-past
             experience
             of
             her
             happie
             gouernment
             ,
             that
             no
             good
             subiect
             shall
             be
             more
             carefull
             to
             enforme
             her
             of
             any
             corruptions
             stollen
             into
             her
             state
             ,
             then
             shee
             shall
             be
             zealous
             ,
             for
             the
             discharge
             of
             her
             conscience
             and
             honour
             ,
             to
             see
             the
             same
             purged
             and
             restored
             to
             the
             auntient
             integritie
             :
             and
             further
             during
             her
             time
             ,
             becomes
             me
             least
             of
             any
             to
             meddle
             in
             it
             ,
             &c
          
           That
           which
           his
           Maiestie
           promised
           in
           behalfe
           of
           our
           late
           Soueraigne
           ,
           God
           shall
           direct
           his
           wisdome
           to
           performe
           by
           himselfe
           :
           the
           dealing
           wherin
           before
           ,
           as
           it
           pleased
           his
           princely
           modestie
           to
           call
           
             medling
             ,
          
           so
           nowe
           the
           whole
           
             managing
          
           thereof
           of
           
           right
           appertaineth
           vnto
           him
           .
        
         
           13.
           
           In
           Dauids
           time
           there
           was
           both
           publikely
           and
           priuately
           a
           free
           entercourse
           of
           religion
           ,
           
           the
           praises
           of
           God
           were
           in
           euery
           mans
           mouth
           :
           
             The
             tribes
             went
             vp
             to
             praise
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Lord.
          
           Their
           seruice
           was
           not
           mute
           and
           dumbe
           ,
           but
           the
           temple
           did
           ring
           and
           sound
           againe
           of
           Gods
           praises
           .
           And
           thankes
           be
           to
           God
           ,
           that
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           is
           not
           forced
           to
           hang
           their
           instruments
           of
           praise
           vpon
           the
           willowes
           with
           the
           Israelites
           in
           Babylon
           ,
           and
           to
           intermit
           the
           comfortable
           exercise
           of
           thankesgiuing
           ,
           as
           it
           hath
           happened
           in
           some
           changes
           ,
           but
           that
           we
           haue
           as
           great
           cause
           ,
           &
           as
           much
           libertie
           as
           euer
           ,
           to
           sound
           out
           Gods
           praises
           :
           that
           we
           may
           say
           with
           the
           prophet
           ,
           
           
             thē
             was
             our
             mouth
             filled
             with
             laughter
             ,
             and
             our
             tongue
             with
             ioy
             .
          
        
         
           14.
           
           Then
           
             were
             the
             thrones
             set
             for
             iudgment
             ;
          
           and
           it
           is
           Gods
           mercie
           ,
           that
           hath
           not
           giuen
           vs
           ouer
           to
           the
           cruell
           desire
           of
           our
           enemies
           ,
           
           that
           the
           course
           of
           iustice
           is
           not
           interrupted
           ,
           but
           the
           lawe
           and
           seates
           of
           iudgment
           open
           for
           euery
           man
           ;
           whose
           heart
           do
           not
           his
           Maiesties
           princely
           speeches
           reuiue
           ,
           thus
           writing
           to
           his
           noble
           sonne
           ,
           
             Preasse
             to
             drawe
             all
             your
             lawes
             and
             processes
             to
             be
             as
             short
             ,
          
           
           
             and
             as
             plaine
             as
             you
             can
             ,
             &c.
             
             wearie
             not
             to
             heare
             the
             complaints
             of
             the
             oppressed
             ,
             aut
             ne
             rex
             sis
             .
          
        
         
           15.
           
           
             Euen
             the
             thrones
             of
             Dauid
             :
          
           
           God
           gaue
           Israel
           no
           stranger
           to
           raigne
           ouer
           them
           ,
           but
           one
           of
           their
           owne
           kinred
           :
           And
           the
           Lord
           hath
           raised
           vnto
           vs
           a
           Soueraigne
           descended
           of
           Dauids
           stocke
           ,
           of
           the
           royall
           blood
           of
           the
           kings
           of
           this
           land
           ;
           a
           prince
           of
           the
           same
           language
           ,
           of
           the
           Island
           ,
           of
           the
           English
           royall
           blood
           ;
           yea
           of
           the
           same
           religion
           :
           who
           ,
           as
           he
           is
           no
           forrainer
           ,
           so
           giueth
           counsell
           to
           his
           princely
           heire
           ,
           
           
             To
             haue
             ordinarie
             councels
             and
             iustice
             seates
             in
             euery
             kingdome
             ,
             of
             their
             owne
             countrimen
             .
          
        
         
           16.
           
           Dauid
           would
           haue
           euery
           one
           
             pray
             for
             the
             peace
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
          
           and
           not
           to
           disturb
           it
           :
           So
           ,
           whereas
           the
           peace
           of
           our
           Church
           hath
           beene
           hindred
           by
           the
           opposition
           of
           strange
           and
           newe
           doctrines
           ,
           
           our
           hope
           is
           ,
           that
           our
           Dauid
           will
           restore
           the
           peace
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           bring
           vs
           to
           one
           vniforme
           doctrine
           ;
           whose
           princely
           aduice
           is
           ,
           
           
             That
             if
             any
             doe
             vrge
             to
             imbrace
             their
             owne
             fantasies
             in
             the
             place
             of
             Gods
             word
             ,
             &c.
             acknowledge
             them
             for
             vaine
             men
             ,
             &c
             ,
             &
             grauely
             and
             with
             authoritie
             redact
             them
             into
             order
             againe
             .
          
        
         
           17.
           
           
             Peace
             be
             within
             thy
             walls
             :
          
           The
           people
           vnder
           Dauid
           were
           freed
           from
           the
           
           feare
           of
           the
           enemie
           :
           
           they
           needed
           not
           to
           set
           watchmen
           vpon
           their
           towers
           ,
           and
           garrisons
           vpon
           their
           walls
           .
           So
           we
           trust
           to
           haue
           peace
           abroad
           with
           other
           nations
           :
           who
           if
           they
           will
           be
           wonne
           with
           kindnesse
           :
           we
           haue
           a
           prince
           that
           will
           vse
           all
           other
           princes
           
             as
             brethren
             ,
          
           
           
             honestly
             and
             kindly
             ,
             and
             will
             striue
             with
             euery
             one
             of
             them
             in
             curtesie
             and
             thankefulnesse
             .
          
           But
           if
           they
           be
           readie
           to
           offend
           our
           nation
           ,
           
           we
           haue
           a
           couragious
           defender
           ,
           
             that
             will
             reuenge
             and
             free
             his
             subiects
             from
             al
             forraine
             iniuries
             done
             vnto
             them
             .
          
        
         
           18.
           
           In
           Dauids
           time
           ,
           plentie
           and
           peace
           was
           within
           their
           pallaces
           and
           houses
           :
           and
           now
           we
           trust
           ,
           
           that
           euen
           our
           children
           shall
           haue
           cause
           to
           blesse
           this
           day
           ,
           wherby
           they
           may
           obtaine
           godly
           education
           ,
           not
           distracted
           from
           their
           parents
           by
           iniquitie
           of
           the
           times
           ,
           which
           was
           feared
           ,
           and
           might
           haue
           iustly
           befallen
           vs
           :
           that
           we
           may
           say
           as
           it
           is
           in
           the
           Psalme
           :
           
             Our
             sonnes
             shall
             grow
             vp
             as
             plāts
             ,
             and
             our
             daughters
             as
             the
             polished
             corners
             of
             the
             temple
             ,
          
           Psal.
           144.
           12.
           
        
         
           19.
           
           
             Dauid
             wisheth
             all
             good
             to
             Israel
             because
             they
             were
             his
             brethren
             and
             neigbours
             :
          
           
           
             God
             hath
             sent
             vs
             a
             louing
             prince
             :
          
           Who
           as
           our
           naturall
           father
           and
           kinde
           master
           ,
           
           thinketh
           his
           greatest
           contentment
           standeth
           in
           his
           subiects
           prosperitie
           ,
           and
           his
           greatest
           suretie
           
           in
           hauing
           their
           hearts
           .
        
         
           20.
           
           
             Dauid
             cheifly
             because
             of
             Gods
             house
             procureth
             the
             peace
             of
             Hierusalem
             :
             Such
             is
             the
             zeale
             and
             affection
             of
             our
             Dauid
             to
             Gods
             house
             :
          
           
           
             who
             holdeth
          
           that
           the
           cheife
           vertue
           which
           should
           be
           in
           a
           Christian
           prince
           ,
           
           namely
           feruencie
           and
           constant
           zeale
           to
           promoote
           the
           glorie
           of
           God
           that
           hath
           honoured
           him
           .
           
             And
             concerning
             the
             Ministers
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
          
           
           
             his
             Maiestie
             saith
             ,
          
           
           Loue
           no
           mā
           more
           then
           a
           good
           pastor
           ,
           reuerence
           and
           obey
           them
           as
           the
           heralds
           of
           the
           most
           high
           God.
           
        
         
           These
           singular
           mercies
           extented
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           England
           ,
           I
           haue
           dispersedly
           handled
           in
           this
           treatise
           ,
           that
           the
           consideration
           thereof
           may
           prouoke
           vs
           to
           thankefulnesse
           .
           And
           in
           trueth
           not
           only
           these
           ,
           but
           many
           other
           blessings
           ,
           with
           a
           full
           horne
           the
           Lord
           at
           this
           present
           some
           in
           possession
           ,
           some
           in
           expectation
           ,
           some
           in
           acte
           ,
           some
           in
           hope
           hath
           powred
           vpon
           vs
           ,
           so
           that
           the
           Church
           may
           say
           with
           Dauid
           :
           
           
             O
             Lord
             my
             God
             thou
             hast
             made
             thy
             wonderfull
             workes
             so
             many
             ,
             that
             none
             can
             count
             in
             order
             thy
             thoughts
             towards
             vs
             :
             I
             would
             declare
             and
             speake
             of
             them
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             moe
             ,
             then
             I
             am
             able
             to
             expresse
             .
          
        
         
           Our
           princely
           Ecclesiastes
           declareth
           ,
           
           that
           a
           king
           should
           be
           
             custos
             vt
             riusque
             tabulae
             :
             
             the
             Gardian
             of
             both
             the
             tables
             of
             the
             lawe
             :
          
           full
           well
           hath
           his
           Maiestie
           testified
           the
           same
           in
           euery
           particular
           ,
           in
           his
           Christian
           and
           iudiciall
           treatises
           .
           
           For
           the
           1.
           lawe
           ,
           he
           professeth
           himselfe
           an
           enemie
           to
           all
           atheisme
           .
           p.
           25.
           for
           the
           2.
           he
           condemneth
           the
           adorers
           of
           legions
           of
           Gods
           ,
           and
           such
           as
           are
           ruled
           by
           the
           foolish
           traditions
           of
           men
           :
           for
           the
           3.
           he
           saith
           ,
           
             beware
             to
             offend
             your
             conscience
             with
             swearing
             ,
          
           
           
             or
             lying
             .
          
           p.
           17.
           
           For
           the
           4.
           
             alwaies
             let
             the
             Sabboth
             be
             kept
             holy
             ,
             and
             no
             vnlawfull
             pastime
             vsed
             .
          
           p.
           53.
           
           For
           the
           5.
           
           
             Honour
             your
             parents
             for
             the
             lengthening
             of
             your
             owne
             daies
             ,
          
           
           
             as
             God
             in
             his
             lawe
             promiseth
             .
          
           p.
           96.
           
           For
           the
           6.
           
           
             There
             are
             some
             horrible
             crimes
          
           (
           saith
           his
           Maiestie
           to
           his
           princely
           heire
           )
           that
           ye
           are
           bound
           in
           conscience
           neuer
           to
           forgiue
           :
           
             Such
             as
             witchcraft
             ,
             wilfull
             murther
             .
          
           p.
           31.
           
           For
           the
           7.
           
           
             God
             commanding
             by
             the
             mouth
             of
             Paul
             to
             abstaine
             from
             fornication
             ,
          
           
           
             declareth
             that
             fornicatours
             shall
             not
             inherit
             the
             kingdome
             of
             God.
          
           p.
           74.
           
           For
           the
           S.
           His
           Maiestie
           hath
           shewed
           his
           worthie
           resolution
           for
           the
           reformation
           of
           robberies
           ,
           and
           oppressions
           of
           the
           Borderours
           .
           p.
           36.
           
           For
           the
           9.
           
           Our
           royall
           Ecclesias●es
           saith
           :
           
             Beware
             to
             offend
             your
             conscience
             with
             vse
             of
             swearing
             ,
             or
             lying
             ,
             &c.
             
             Lying
             commeth
             much
             of
             a
             
             vile
             vse
             which
             banisheth
             shame
             .
          
           pag.
           17.
           18.
           
           For
           the
           10.
           
           His
           princely
           counsell
           is
           ,
           
             Abstaine
             from
             haunting
             before
             your
             marriage
             ,
             the
             idle
             companie
             of
             dames
             ,
             which
             are
             nothing
             else
             ,
             but
             irritamenta
             libidinis
             .
          
           p.
           127.
           
        
         
           Thus
           our
           Iosua
           well
           remembreth
           the
           wordes
           of
           the
           Lord
           vnto
           that
           valiant
           captaine
           :
           let
           not
           this
           booke
           of
           the
           lawe
           depart
           out
           of
           thy
           mouth
           ,
           but
           meditate
           therein
           day
           and
           night
           ,
           that
           thou
           maiest
           obserue
           and
           doe
           according
           to
           all
           ,
           that
           is
           written
           therein
           :
           of
           whome
           I
           trust
           ,
           we
           may
           truely
           say
           ,
           as
           Ambrose
           of
           Theodosius
           ,
           
             Licet
             in
             aliis
             laudabilis
             ,
          
           
           
             tamen
             apex
             tuorum
             operum
             pieta●
             semper
             fuit
             :
             though
             in
             other
             things
             you
             are
             praise-worthie
             ,
             yet
             the
             cheifest
             of
             all
             your
             workes
             is
             humilitie
             .
          
        
         
           Further
           our
           noble
           teacher
           prescribeth
           euery
           man
           his
           dutie
           :
           
           from
           this
           lampe
           there
           is
           no
           calling
           but
           may
           fetch
           light
           ,
           and
           deriue
           water
           from
           this
           fountaine
           .
           Euen
           here
           may
           the
           nobilitie
           learne
           ,
           not
           to
           
             thrall
             by
             oppression
             the
             meaner
             sort
             ,
             that
             doe
             dwell
             by
             them
             ,
          
           
           
             nor
             to
             maintaine
             their
             seruants
             and
             dependants
             in
             wrong
             .
          
           p.
           45.
           
           Merchants
           are
           taught
           not
           to
           buy
           
             the
             worst
             wares
             ,
             and
             sell
             them
             at
             the
             dearest
             prices
             .
          
           p.
           50.
           
           Iudges
           are
           admonished
           to
           take
           heed
           
           of
           briberie
           ,
           aduocates
           to
           decline
           the
           
             long
             .
             somnesse
             of
             suites
             for
             the
             inriching
             of
             themselues
             ,
             with
             the
             spoile
             of
             the
             whole
             countrey
             .
          
           p.
           90.
           
           Church
           gouernours
           to
           preserue
           
             doctrine
             and
             discipline
             in
             puritie
             ,
             according
             to
             Gods
             word
             ,
          
           p.
           43.
           
           Yea
           ministers
           &
           preachers
           may
           receiue
           instruction
           for
           their
           calling
           ,
           how
           to
           handle
           the
           word
           .
           1.
           not
           to
           varie
           from
           their
           text
           .
           2.
           not
           to
           meddle
           with
           matters
           of
           state
           ▪
           p.
           89.
           3.
           that
           their
           
             speech
             be
             not
             fairded
             with
             artifice
             ,
             &c.
          
           but
           to
           eschewe
           all
           affected
           formes
           .
           p.
           115.
           4.
           
           
             We
             are
             taught
             to
             vse
             onely
             Scripture
             ,
          
           (
           saith
           our
           Ecclesiasticall
           Salomon
           )
           
             for
             interpretation
             of
             scripture
             ,
          
           
           
             if
             we
             would
             be
             sure
             ,
             &
             neuer
             swarue
             from
             the
             analogie
             of
             faith
             in
             expounding
             .
          
           May
           we
           not
           now
           truely
           without
           flatterie
           pronounce
           that
           saying
           ,
           which
           the
           kingly
           preacher
           vttered
           of
           himselfe
           ?
           
             The
             more
             wise
             the
             preacher
             was
             ,
          
           
           
             the
             more
             he
             taught
             the
             people
             knowledge
             ,
             and
             caused
             them
             to
             heare
             .
          
           And
           in
           this
           sense
           we
           find
           that
           saying
           true
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           Euery
           good
           prince
           is
           of
           a
           priestly
           order
           ,
           instructing
           his
           subiects
           both
           by
           wholesome
           lawes
           and
           precepts
           ,
           and
           a
           vertuous
           example
           .
        
         
           Neither
           haue
           we
           onely
           from
           our
           christian
           Salomon
           the
           light
           of
           direction
           ,
           but
           
           the
           sweete
           influence
           also
           of
           comfort
           and
           consolation
           :
           
           that
           there
           is
           no
           sort
           or
           degree
           ,
           that
           is
           not
           interessed
           in
           this
           common
           benefit
           .
           The
           nobilitie
           shall
           be
           duly
           respected
           :
           
             eschew
             the
             other
             extremitie
             in
             lightlying
             &
             cōtemning
             your
             nobilitie
             .
             p.
             47.
             schooles
             and
             schollers
             maintained
             .
             p.
             43.
             
             Ministers
             reuerenced
             and
             sufficiently
             prouided
             for
             .
             p.
             44
             :
             souldiours
             and
             martiall
             men
             liberally
             rewarded
             .
             p.
             59.
             faithfull
             and
             diligent
             seruants
             recompenced
             .
             p.
             71.
             the
             worthiest
             still
             preferred
             :
             let
             the
             measure
             of
             your
             loue
             to
             euery
             one
             be
             according
             to
             the
             measure
             of
             his
             vertue
             .
             p.
             152.
             all
             subiects
             relieued
             ,
             and
             their
             oppressions
             helped
             :
             be
             diligent
             to
             trie
             ,
             and
             carefull
             to
             beate
             downe
             the
             hornes
             of
             proud
             oppressours
             :
             embrace
             the
             quarrell
             of
             the
             poore
             and
             distressed
             ,
             as
             your
             owne
             particular
             .
             &c.
             p.
          
           34.
           
           What
           degree
           then
           or
           calling
           is
           there
           in
           the
           land
           ,
           which
           hath
           not
           great
           cause
           to
           reioyce
           in
           the
           aduancement
           of
           so
           worthie
           a
           prince
           ?
           I
           speake
           not
           this
           (
           God
           is
           my
           record
           )
           to
           please
           by
           glozing
           speach
           ,
           for
           I
           should
           so
           rather
           displease
           ;
           his
           Maiesties
           mind
           herein
           is
           well
           knowne
           :
           
             loue
             them
             best
             ,
             that
             are
             plainest
             with
             you
             .
             p.
          
           71.
           but
           I
           trust
           I
           may
           speake
           the
           truth
           without
           flatterie
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           world
           ,
           I
           thinke
           will
           witnesse
           with
           me
           ,
           that
           I
           haue
           not
           fabled
           .
           It
           is
           fit
           that
           Gods
           
           graces
           vpon
           his
           Maiestie
           ,
           and
           mercies
           therein
           toward
           vs
           should
           be
           proclaimed
           and
           published
           ,
           that
           his
           highnesse
           may
           thereby
           be
           stirred
           vp
           to
           proceed
           and
           goe
           forward
           ,
           and
           the
           people
           prouoked
           to
           be
           thankefull
           .
           As
           herein
           no
           nation
           hath
           greater
           cause
           to
           ioy
           then
           England
           ,
           to
           whome
           God
           hath
           giuen
           a
           prince
           respectiue
           to
           all
           sorts
           and
           degrees
           in
           their
           places
           ,
           and
           according
           to
           their
           necessities
           :
           who
           herein
           may
           be
           compared
           with
           Eliakim
           ,
           
             to
             a
             sure
             naile
             ,
             wherevpon
             all
             vessels
             both
             small
             and
             great
             doe
             hang
             ,
             euen
             from
             the
             cuppes
             to
             the
             instruments
             of
             musicke
             ,
          
           Isay.
           22.
           13.
           24.
           
           And
           as
           Ambrose
           applieth
           that
           saying
           in
           the
           Canticles
           :
           
           
             Species
             eius
             sunt
             cedrus
             Lebani
             ,
             quae
             ramum
             nubib
             .
             ,
             radicem
             in
             terris
             inserit
             ;
             in
             altis
             habitat
             ,
             humilia
             respicit
             :
             His
             countenāce
             is
             like
             the
             Cedar
             of
             Lebanus
             ,
             which
             stretcheth
             the
             branches
             to
             heauen
             ,
             and
             the
             roote
             to
             the
             earth
             :
             so
             beeing
             in
             high
             estate
             he
             respecteth
             the
             lowly
             .
          
           I
           trust
           of
           such
           a
           prince
           England
           may
           more
           truly
           pronounce
           ,
           then
           Rome
           of
           Scipio
           ▪
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           :
           
             that
             Rome
             could
             not
             fall
             as
             long
             as
             Scipio
             stood
             .
          
           But
           we
           assure
           our selues
           that
           this
           Church
           and
           common-wealth
           through
           Gods
           gratious
           fauour
           shall
           not
           miscarrie
           ,
           as
           long
           as
           his
           Maiestie
           liueth
           .
        
         
         
           But
           because
           perseuerance
           is
           Gods
           gift
           ,
           and
           there
           is
           no
           mortall
           nature
           ,
           but
           is
           subiect
           to
           chaunge
           ,
           it
           is
           our
           part
           to
           pray
           vnto
           God
           ,
           to
           giue
           strength
           and
           grace
           to
           our
           Christian
           prince
           ,
           to
           hold
           out
           in
           this
           godly
           course
           ,
           and
           that
           his
           Maiestie
           be
           not
           snared
           or
           intangled
           with
           this
           great
           honour
           ,
           wealth
           ,
           and
           prosperitie
           ,
           to
           the
           which
           the
           Lord
           hath
           aduanced
           him
           ,
           but
           may
           take
           heed
           by
           the
           example
           of
           the
           fall
           of
           Dauid
           ,
           the
           backsliding
           of
           Salomon
           ,
           the
           declining
           of
           Asa
           ,
           that
           he
           forget
           not
           the
           lord
           his
           god
           ,
           that
           hath
           exalted
           him
           :
           which
           by
           Gods
           grace
           we
           doubt
           not
           ,
           as
           his
           highnesse
           hath
           herein
           
             a
             firme
             trust
          
           (
           thus
           professing
           of
           himselfe
           )
           
             that
             it
             shall
             please
             God
             ,
          
           
           
             who
             with
             my
             being
             and
             crowne
             gaue
             me
             this
             minde
             ,
             to
             maintaine
             and
             augment
             the
             same
             in
             me
             and
             my
             posteritie
             .
          
           And
           God
           giue
           vs
           the
           people
           of
           England
           the
           like
           grace
           ,
           that
           we
           may
           continue
           obedient
           to
           God
           ,
           loyall
           and
           dutifull
           to
           our
           prince
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           haue
           comfort
           of
           vs
           ,
           and
           we
           ioy
           of
           him
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           many
           yeares
           raigne
           ouer
           vs
           in
           godlinesse
           and
           peace
           ,
           and
           his
           posteritie
           after
           him
           :
           that
           God
           may
           aboundantly
           blesse
           both
           prince
           and
           people
           in
           this
           life
           ,
           and
           afterward
           grant
           vs
           both
           a
           ioyfull
           entrance
           into
           his
           euerlasting
           
           kingdome
           through
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           to
           whome
           be
           praise
           for
           euer
           .
           Amen
           .
        
         
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
           Certaine
           fruitfull
           meditations
           vpon
           the
           122.
           
           Psalme
           ,
           by
           the
           example
           of
           the
           people
           of
           God
           reioycing
           vnder
           the
           raigne
           of
           King
           David
           for
           God●
           manifold
           benefits
           ,
           moouing
           the
           Church
           and
           nation
           of
           England
           to
           the
           like
           thankefulnes
           to
           God
           for
           his
           vnspeakable
           mercies
           shewed
           aboundantly
           toward
           vs.
           
        
         
           Psal.
           122.
           
        
         
           A
           song
           of
           degrees
           of
           Dauid
           .
        
         
           
             v.
             1.
             
             I
             reioyced
             ,
             when
             they
             said
             to
             me
             ,
             Let
             vs
             goe
             vp
             to
             the
             house
             of
             the
             Lord
             :
          
           
             2.
             
             Our
             foote
             shall
             stand
             in
             thy
             gates
             ,
             O
             Ierusalem
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Ierusalem
             is
             builded
             as
             a
             citie
             ,
             that
             is
             compact
             together
             in
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Whether
             the
             tribes
             goe
             vp
             ,
             the
             tribes
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             to
             the
             testimonie
             of
             Israel
             ,
             to
             praise
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Lord.
          
           
             5.
             
             For
             there
             are
             thrones
             for
             iudgement
             ,
             the
             thrones
             of
             the
             house
             of
             Dauid
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             Pray
             for
             the
             peace
             of
             Ierusalem
             ,
             let
             them
             
             prosper
             that
             loue
             thee
             :
          
           
             7.
             
             Peace
             be
             within
             thy
             walles
             ,
             and
             prosperitie
             within
             thy
             palaces
             .
          
           
             8.
             
             For
             my
             brethren
             and
             companions
             sake
             I
             will
             wish
             thee
             now
             prosperitie
             :
          
           
             9.
             
             Because
             of
             the
             house
             of
             the
             Lord
             our
             God
             ,
             I
             will
             procure
             thy
             wealth
             .
          
        
         
           THis
           Psalme
           ,
           wherein
           the
           kingly
           Prophet
           Dauid
           expresseth
           his
           great
           ioy
           for
           Gods
           singular
           mercies
           to
           his
           Church
           ,
           consisteth
           of
           two
           parts
           :
           the
           first
           containeth
           a
           
             congratulation
          
           with
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           a
           ioyfull
           declaration
           of
           his
           gladsome
           heart
           ,
           v.
           1.
           with
           the
           causes
           thereof
           first
           generally
           propounded
           ,
           v.
           2.
           then
           particularly
           prooued
           :
           which
           are
           ,
           1.
           the
           great
           vnitie
           and
           concord
           of
           the
           citie
           ,
           the
           Iebusites
           beeing
           now
           expulsed
           .
           v.
           3.
           as
           we
           read
           in
           the
           storie
           2.
           
           Sam.
           5.
           6.
           2.
           
           The
           restauration
           of
           Gods
           worship
           ,
           the
           arke
           beeing
           now
           brought
           to
           Ierusalem
           ,
           v.
           4.
           see
           the
           whole
           narration
           thereof
           2.
           
           Sam.
           6.
           3.
           
           The
           administration
           of
           iustice
           established
           ,
           v.
           5.
           which
           had
           beene
           much
           hindred
           by
           the
           diuision
           betweene
           the
           house
           of
           Dauid
           and
           Saul
           .
           2.
           
           Sam.
           4.
           1.
           
        
         
         
           The
           second
           part
           of
           the
           Psalme
           is
           an
           exhortation
           to
           all
           Gods
           people
           ,
           to
           pray
           for
           the
           continuance
           of
           these
           benefits
           ,
           vers
           .
           6.
           which
           is
           inforced
           ,
           by
           setting
           downe
           the
           forme
           of
           their
           godly
           praiers
           and
           desires
           ,
           v.
           7.
           and
           propounding
           his
           owne
           example
           in
           the
           performance
           of
           that
           dutie
           in
           his
           owne
           person
           ,
           and
           the
           reasons
           moouing
           him
           thereto
           ;
           the
           law
           of
           his
           countrie
           ,
           v.
           8.
           his
           affection
           to
           Gods
           Church
           .
           v.
           9.
           
        
         
           
             A
             song
             of
             degrees
             of
             Dauid
             .
          
           
             Before
             I
             enter
             to
             treat
             of
             this
             Psalme
             ,
             three
             things
             are
             out
             of
             this
             inscription
             of
             the
             psalme
             to
             be
             considered
             :
             1.
             the
             occasion
             of
             making
             and
             enditing
             this
             psalme
             :
             2.
             the
             author
             thereof
             ,
             which
             is
             Dauid
             :
             3.
             the
             title
             it selfe
             ,
             why
             it
             is
             called
             a
             psalme
             of
             degrees
             .
          
           
             
               The
               1.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               First
               ,
               the
               occasion
               ,
               as
               is
               partly
               touched
               before
               ,
               was
               threefold
               :
               1.
               the
               vniting
               of
               the
               citie
               of
               Ierusalem
               before
               infested
               with
               the
               idolatrous
               Iebusites
               .
               2.
               
               The
               restoring
               of
               religion
               maimed
               before
               by
               the
               absence
               of
               the
               Arke
               ,
               which
               was
               twentie
               yeares
               in
               the
               house
               of
               Abinadab
               .
               1.
               
               Sam.
               7.
               2.
               3.
               
               The
               reconciling
               of
               the
               kingdome
               before
               diuided
               betweene
               the
               house
               of
               Dauid
               &
               Saul
               :
               
               for
               these
               so
               great
               blessings
               the
               Prophet
               reioyceth
               before
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               exhorteth
               the
               whole
               church
               of
               God
               to
               reioyce
               with
               him
               .
               We
               learne
               hereby
               ,
               that
               like
               blessings
               ,
               require
               like
               thanks
               ,
               &
               that
               we
               also
               should
               for
               all
               Gods
               mercies
               to
               his
               Church
               remēber
               to
               be
               thankfull
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Thus
               elswhere
               the
               prophet
               Dauid
               saith
               :
               
                 My
                 soule
                 praise
                 thou
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 and
                 forget
                 not
                 any
                 of
                 his
                 benefits
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               103.
               2.
               
               Yea
               this
               is
               an
               euident
               marke
               of
               Gods
               Church
               to
               shew
               themselues
               thankfull
               :
               
                 The
                 voice
                 of
                 ioy
                 and
                 health
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 tabernacles
                 of
                 the
                 righteous
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               118.
               15.
               
            
             
               2
               This
               hath
               beene
               the
               practise
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               from
               time
               to
               time
               :
               Thus
               Moses
               and
               the
               children
               of
               Israel
               ,
               as
               soone
               as
               they
               came
               foorth
               of
               the
               red
               sea
               ,
               sung
               a
               song
               of
               thanksgiuing
               vnto
               God.
               Exod.
               15.
               1.
               
               Dauid
               daunced
               and
               sprang
               for
               ioy
               ,
               for
               the
               bringing
               home
               of
               the
               Arke
               .
               2.
               
               Sam.
               6.
               14.
               
               Iehosaphat
               and
               his
               people
               praised
               God
               for
               the
               victorie
               ouer
               the
               Moabites
               and
               Ammonites
               ,
               in
               the
               valley
               of
               Berachah
               ,
               which
               was
               so
               called
               ,
               because
               there
               they
               blessed
               God.
               2.
               
               Chro.
               20.
               27.
               
            
             
               3
               Our
               thanksgiuing
               vnto
               God
               is
               as
               incense
               ,
               
               Psal.
               141.
               2.
               that
               as
               they
               vsed
               to
               lay
               oyle
               ,
               and
               incense
               vpon
               their
               sacrifices
               .
               Levit
               .
               
               2.
               15.
               the
               one
               maketh
               a
               cheerefull
               countenance
               ,
               the
               other
               is
               gratefull
               to
               the
               smell
               :
               ●o
               should
               all
               our
               actions
               be
               perfumed
               with
               thanksgiuing
               vnto
               God.
               This
               dutie
               of
               praise
               is
               compared
               by
               the
               people
               ,
               to
               a
               young
               bullocke
               ,
               that
               hath
               hornes
               and
               hoofes
               ,
               Psal.
               66.
               31.
               
               He
               then
               that
               remembreth
               not
               to
               giue
               thankes
               vnto
               God
               ,
               is
               as
               though
               he
               offered
               an
               olde
               and
               leane
               bullocke
               ,
               beeing
               faint
               and
               slouthfull
               to
               praise
               God
               :
               without
               hornes
               and
               hoofes
               :
               such
               an
               one
               shall
               neither
               haue
               strength
               to
               withstand
               and
               push
               the
               spirituall
               aduersarie
               ,
               neither
               is
               shodde
               with
               hoofes
               and
               prepared
               to
               beare
               all
               things
               patiently
               .
            
             
               4
               If
               the
               superstitious
               heathen
               doe
               encourage
               themselues
               to
               praise
               the
               gods
               of
               gold
               and
               of
               siluer
               ,
               Dan.
               5.
               4.
               to
               whome
               no
               praise
               is
               due
               ,
               much
               more
               are
               we
               bound
               to
               render
               praise
               to
               God
               ,
               to
               whome
               it
               of
               duty
               belongeth
               :
               it
               is
               all
               the
               recompence
               which
               we
               pay
               vnto
               the
               Lord.
               
                 Quid
                 repēdam
                 Iehouae
                 ?
                 What
                 shall
                 I
                 pay
                 vnto
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 for
                 all
                 his
                 benefits
                 towards
                 me
                 ,
                 I
                 will
                 take
                 the
                 cuppe
                 of
                 sauing
                 health
                 ,
                 and
                 call
                 vpon
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               116.
               12.
               
               Giuing
               of
               thanks
               then
               vnto
               God
               for
               his
               benefits
               ▪
               is
               as
               our
               Landlords
               rent
               ;
               vnworthie
               are
               we
               to
               hold
               our
               farmes
               ,
               if
               we
               refuse
               to
               pay
               so
               easie
               a
               rent-charge
               :
               
               our
               great
               Landlord
               ,
               of
               whome
               kings
               and
               princes
               hold
               their
               kingdomes
               ,
               raiseth
               not
               his
               rent
               ,
               but
               onely
               expecteth
               the
               old
               seruice
               of
               thanksgiuing
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               freest
               rent
               that
               can
               be
               .
            
             
               5
               So
               then
               ,
               as
               here
               the
               Prophet
               Dauid
               made
               this
               song
               or
               hymne
               for
               his
               people
               ,
               to
               shewe
               their
               thankefulnesse
               to
               God
               ,
               for
               those
               great
               blessings
               :
               we
               ought
               also
               ,
               vpon
               the
               like
               occasion
               now
               offered
               to
               expresse
               our
               ioy
               before
               the
               Lord
               :
               Dauid
               vnited
               the
               kingdome
               before
               deuided
               ;
               and
               now
               God
               hath
               raised
               vp
               vnto
               vs
               a
               prince
               ,
               in
               whome
               both
               the
               regiments
               of
               England
               and
               Scotland
               are
               conioyned
               :
               great
               was
               the
               rent
               which
               in
               time
               past
               was
               between
               these
               two
               nations
               (
               though
               for
               these
               40.
               yeares
               ,
               
               the
               gospell
               ,
               
               the
               onely
               bond
               of
               peace
               ,
               hath
               maintained
               loue
               and
               amitie
               amongest
               vs
               )
               yet
               pitifull
               is
               the
               remembrance
               of
               former
               calamities
               :
               how
               continually
               these
               nations
               did
               one
               offend
               another
               ,
               with
               bloudie
               and
               grieuous
               battells
               :
               Sometime
               the
               English
               preuailed
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               21.
               yeare
               of
               Edward
               the
               first
               ,
               
               there
               were
               40.
               thousand
               of
               the
               Scots
               slaine
               in
               one
               battell
               :
               Sometime
               the
               Scottes
               had
               the
               vpper
               hand
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               7.
               yeare
               of
               Edward
               the
               second
               ,
               in
               a
               battell
               fought
               at
               Retraueling
               in
               Scotland
               ,
               there
               
               were
               put
               to
               the
               sword
               ,
               and
               taken
               ,
               10
               thousand
               ,
               or
               after
               the
               Scottish
               historie
               ,
               50.
               thousand
               English
               ▪
               I
               will
               not
               make
               mention
               of
               Flodden
               and
               Musleborough
               fields
               ,
               &
               other
               fierce
               battels
               between
               these
               nations
               By
               this
               ye
               may
               consider
               ,
               what
               a
               great
               blessing
               is
               like
               to
               ensue
               vpon
               this
               ioyfull
               coniunction
               of
               these
               kingdomes
               .
            
             
               Dauid
               againe
               brought
               home
               the
               arke
               ,
               that
               a
               long
               time
               had
               soiourned
               abroad
               :
               &
               this
               is
               our
               greatest
               comfort
               ,
               
               that
               contrarie
               to
               the
               desire
               and
               expectation
               of
               the
               Papists
               ,
               
               God
               hath
               sent
               vs
               a
               Princely
               shepheard
               ,
               that
               shall
               still
               lead
               his
               people
               to
               the
               greene
               pastures
               ,
               and
               refresh
               them
               stil
               with
               the
               waters
               of
               the
               word
               of
               life
               .
            
             
               Dauid
               also
               expelled
               the
               Iebusites
               out
               of
               Ierusalem
               :
               and
               there
               are
               yet
               some
               Cananites
               in
               the
               land
               ;
               Iesuites
               they
               are
               called
               ,
               but
               more
               truely
               Iudasites
               ,
               and
               other
               of
               Baals
               priests
               ,
               with
               whome
               I
               trust
               such
               order
               shall
               be
               taken
               ,
               that
               they
               be
               no
               more
               as
               thornes
               in
               our
               eies
               ,
               and
               prickes
               in
               our
               sides
               .
               Thus
               you
               see
               how
               iust
               cause
               we
               haue
               to
               celebrate
               a
               song
               of
               thanksgiuing
               ,
               with
               the
               Prophet
               Dauid
               for
               Gods
               great
               mercies
               :
               which
               shall
               be
               a
               meanes
               ,
               when
               the
               Lord
               seeth
               our
               thankfull
               acceptance
               of
               these
               good
               beginnings
               ,
               that
               the
               proceedings
               
               shall
               be
               answerable
               :
               for
               God
               by
               our
               thanksgiuing
               is
               not
               profited
               ,
               but
               we
               are
               altogether
               thereby
               benefited
               :
               as
               it
               is
               said
               in
               Iob
               ,
               
                 If
                 thou
                 be
                 righteous
                 ,
                 what
                 giuest
                 thou
                 vnto
                 him
                 ?
                 thy
                 righteousnesse
                 may
                 profit
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 man.
              
               Augustine
               teacheth
               this
               point
               well
               :
               
                 Non
                 laudibus
                 nostris
                 ille
                 crescit
                 ,
                 sed
                 nos
                 ,
                 deus
                 nec
                 melior
                 fit
                 si
                 lauda●eris
                 ,
                 nec
                 deterior
                 ,
                 si
                 vituperaueris
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 God
                 increaseth
                 not
                 by
                 our
                 praise
                 ,
                 but
                 we
                 :
                 he
                 is
                 not
                 the
                 better
                 for
                 our
                 praise
                 ,
              
               
               
                 nor
                 worse
                 for
                 our
                 dispraise
                 :
                 but
                 we
                 are
                 the
                 better
                 if
                 we
                 praise
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 worse
                 if
                 we
                 praise
                 him
                 not
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               The
               2.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 A
                 song
                 of
                 Dauid
                 :
                 ]
              
               That
               Church
               and
               common-wealth
               is
               happie
               to
               whome
               god
               giueth
               a
               Prince
               ,
               such
               as
               Dauid
               was
               ,
               whose
               heart
               is
               set
               aright
               to
               seeke
               God.
               In
               that
               Dauid
               was
               occupied
               in
               godly
               meditations
               ,
               and
               did
               exercise
               himselfe
               to
               endite
               holy
               songs
               and
               sonnets
               ,
               to
               the
               praise
               of
               God
               and
               comfort
               of
               his
               church
               ;
               Princes
               are
               taught
               to
               be
               deuoted
               to
               the
               worship
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               subiects
               doe
               learne
               to
               pray
               to
               God
               to
               send
               them
               ▪
               Kings
               and
               gouernours
               such
               as
               Dauid
               was
               ,
               after
               Gods
               owne
               heart
               .
            
             
             
               1.
               
               Thus
               the
               prophet
               Esay
               ,
               speaking
               of
               the
               last
               times
               ,
               saith
               ,
               that
               kings
               shall
               be
               nourcing
               fathers
               ,
               and
               Queenes
               nourcing
               mothers
               of
               his
               Church
               ,
               Isay
               ,
               49.
               23.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Such
               was
               Salomon
               ,
               that
               praied
               himselfe
               in
               the
               audience
               of
               the
               people
               ,
               with
               his
               hands
               stretched
               out
               vnto
               God
               at
               the
               dedication
               of
               the
               temple
               ,
               1.
               
               King
               ,
               8.
               
               The
               same
               wise
               and
               vertuous
               Prince
               did
               write
               those
               heauenly
               bookes
               of
               the
               Prouerbes
               ,
               Ecclesiastes
               ,
               the
               Canticles
               ;
               &
               giueth
               himselfe
               the
               name
               of
               a
               preacher
               ,
               Eccles.
               1.
               1.
               
               Such
               an
               one
               was
               Iosias
               ,
               that
               himselfe
               read
               in
               the
               eares
               of
               the
               people
               the
               bookes
               of
               gods
               couenant
               .
               2.
               
               King.
               23.
               2.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               praiers
               should
               be
               as
               the
               
                 he
                 goates
                 before
                 the
                 flocke
                 .
              
               Ierem.
               5.
               8.
               to
               goe
               before
               the
               rest
               by
               their
               good
               example
               ;
               whose
               godly
               lawes
               and
               wholesome
               precepts
               are
               as
               the
               
                 raine
                 that
                 commeth
                 vpon
                 the
                 mowen
                 grasse
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               72.
               6.
               
               So
               they
               make
               religion
               and
               vertue
               to
               increase
               and
               flourish
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Hereunto
               Princes
               should
               be
               mooued
               ,
               considering
               whose
               place
               and
               office
               they
               beare
               in
               earth
               :
               that
               
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 called
                 Gods
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               82.
               1.
               so
               they
               should
               seeke
               to
               set
               forth
               gods
               glorie
               :
               for
               they
               are
               called
               gods
               ,
               as
               our
               Sauiour
               expoundeth
               it
               ,
               
                 because
                 to
                 them
                 the
                 word
                 of
                 God
                 is
                 giuen
                 :
              
               Iohn
               10.
               35.
               
               
               The
               cheife
               charge
               and
               care
               of
               preseruing
               the
               worde
               of
               God
               is
               committed
               to
               them
               .
               Philip
               an
               heathen
               king
               could
               say
               ,
               that
               a
               Prince
               must
               remember
               ,
               
               
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 obtained
                 a
                 diuine
                 power
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 should
                 command
                 diuine
                 things
                 .
              
            
             
               Beside
               great
               is
               the
               reward
               of
               godly
               and
               vertuous
               Princes
               ,
               who
               by
               their
               good
               example
               drawe
               others
               vnto
               God
               :
               
                 They
                 that
                 turne
                 many
                 to
                 righteousnesse
                 ,
                 shall
                 shine
                 as
                 the
                 starres
                 for
                 euer
                 and
                 euer
                 ,
              
               Dan.
               12.
               3.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               Wherefore
               ,
               as
               this
               consideration
               should
               stirre
               vs
               vp
               to
               giue
               great
               thankes
               vnto
               God
               ,
               
               that
               hath
               in
               his
               mercie
               sent
               vs
               a
               Prince
               ,
               not
               onely
               wise
               and
               learned
               ,
               but
               sound
               in
               religion
               ,
               and
               deuout
               in
               affection
               ,
               as
               appeareth
               by
               his
               Maiesties
               books
               ,
               such
               as
               we
               found
               not
               the
               like
               written
               by
               any
               king
               of
               this
               nation
               before
               .
               So
               let
               vs
               not
               be
               slacke
               to
               commend
               his
               Maiestie
               in
               our
               continuall
               praiers
               vnto
               God
               ,
               that
               the
               lord
               would
               direct
               him
               by
               his
               spirit
               ,
               and
               guide
               him
               in
               his
               feare
               ,
               and
               strengthen
               him
               to
               holde
               out
               to
               the
               end
               ,
               that
               godly
               course
               which
               he
               is
               entred
               into
               .
            
             
               And
               further
               the
               people
               of
               God
               are
               taught
               ,
               that
               where
               the
               Lord
               hath
               vouchsafed
               so
               great
               a
               blessing
               ,
               then
               the
               which
               in
               this
               world
               there
               can
               be
               no
               greater
               ,
               to
               send
               
               his
               Church
               a
               Nursing
               father
               ,
               and
               the
               Cōmonwealth
               a
               prudent
               and
               vertuous
               gouernour
               ,
               they
               should
               endeauour
               for
               their
               parts
               ,
               in
               pietie
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               obedience
               to
               their
               prince
               ,
               and
               in
               all
               Christian
               duties
               to
               be
               answerable
               .
               It
               is
               a
               monstrous
               thing
               ,
               that
               there
               should
               be
               a
               good
               prince
               ,
               and
               a
               bad
               people
               ,
               a
               sound
               head
               ,
               and
               a
               diseased
               bodie
               .
               The
               subiect
               should
               not
               by
               his
               vntowardnes
               grieue
               the
               heart
               of
               a
               good
               prince
               ;
               but
               shew
               himselfe
               so
               conformable
               to
               all
               acts
               of
               pietie
               ,
               that
               the
               vertuous
               gouernour
               may
               reioyce
               in
               the
               obedience
               and
               deuotion
               of
               his
               people
               ;
               that
               in
               the
               ende
               he
               may
               yeeld
               vp
               himselfe
               and
               his
               people
               with
               comfort
               vnto
               God
               ,
               and
               say
               with
               the
               prophet
               ,
               
                 Behold
                 here
                 am
                 I
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 children
                 which
                 thou
                 hast
                 giuen
                 me
                 .
              
               Isa.
               8.
               18.
               
               For
               as
               Ambrose
               saith
               of
               good
               children
               ,
               so
               it
               is
               true
               of
               good
               subiects
               :
               
                 Stipendia
                 militiae
                 suae
                 sunt
                 ,
                 vernet
                 in
                 dei
                 laudem
                 terra
                 quia
                 colitur
                 ,
                 mundus
                 ,
                 quia
                 agnoscitur
                 ,
                 ecclesia
                 ,
                 quia
                 devotae
                 plebis
                 numerus
                 a●getur
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 as
                 the
                 hire
                 or
                 reward
                 of
                 the
                 princes
                 warfare
                 :
                 let
                 the
                 earth
                 sprout
                 forth
                 to
                 Gods
                 praise
                 ,
                 because
                 it
                 is
                 tilled
                 ,
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 because
                 it
                 is
                 inhabited
                 ,
                 the
                 Church
                 because
                 it
                 is
                 with
                 deuout
                 children
                 filled
                 and
                 replenished
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
             
               The
               3.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 Of
                 degrees
                 ]
              
               There
               are
               thus
               intituled
               15.
               psalmes
               ,
               that
               are
               here
               set
               together
               :
               which
               are
               next
               this
               so
               called
               ,
               as
               though
               the
               Leuits
               were
               appointed
               to
               sing
               them
               vpon
               the
               degrees
               and
               staires
               of
               the
               temple
               ,
               
               for
               as
               yet
               in
               Dauids
               time
               ,
               the
               temple
               was
               not
               built
               ,
               nor
               the
               plot
               thereof
               drawne
               ,
               or
               the
               forme
               and
               patterne
               set
               forth
               :
               neither
               is
               it
               to
               be
               referred
               to
               the
               rising
               of
               the
               tune
               ,
               wherewith
               those
               psalmes
               were
               sung
               in
               the
               temple
               :
               for
               other
               psalmes
               beside
               these
               were
               tuned
               sometime
               with
               the
               falling
               ,
               sometime
               with
               the
               rising
               of
               the
               voice
               :
               
               some
               in
               an
               high
               tune
               were
               sounded
               forth
               ,
               which
               was
               called
               Atamoth
               ,
               1.
               
               Chron.
               15.
               20.
               some
               in
               the
               eight
               or
               base
               tune
               ,
               as
               psal
               .
               6.
               and
               12.
               which
               was
               called
               Sheminith
               ,
               1.
               
               Chron.
               15.
               21.
               
               This
               title
               then
               ,
               if
               it
               depended
               of
               the
               tune
               ,
               could
               not
               be
               proper
               to
               these
               psalms
               .
               Wherefore
               psalmes
               of
               degrees
               signifie
               nothing
               els
               ,
               but
               excellent
               songs
               ,
               of
               an
               higher
               degree
               ,
               and
               more
               principall
               vse
               :
               for
               so
               the
               word
               
                 magualah
              
               is
               sometime
               taken
               ;
               as
               ,
               1.
               
               Chron.
               17.
               17.
               
               Dauid
               saith
               ,
               
                 Thou
                 hast
                 regarded
                 me
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 estate
                 of
                 a
                 man
                 of
                 high
                 degree
                 ,
                 O
                 Lord.
                 
              
            
             
               From
               hence
               then
               it
               may
               be
               gathered
               ,
               
               that
               although
               the
               word
               of
               God
               in
               it selfe
               is
               of
               the
               same
               excellencie
               ,
               as
               proceeding
               frō
               one
               and
               the
               same
               author
               ,
               yet
               in
               respect
               of
               our
               vse
               ,
               and
               mens
               seuerall
               necessities
               ,
               some
               part
               of
               the
               Scripture
               may
               be
               saide
               to
               be
               more
               excellent
               ,
               then
               an
               other
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               whereas
               the
               scripture
               is
               profitable
               to
               fowre
               speciall
               vses
               ,
               
               to
               teach
               ,
               to
               improoue
               ,
               to
               correct
               ,
               and
               instruct
               in
               righteousnes
               ,
               as
               the
               Apostle
               sheweth
               ,
               2.
               
               Tim.
               3.
               16.
               which
               fowre
               properties
               are
               answerable
               to
               those
               fowre
               set
               downe
               by
               the
               prophet
               Dauid
               ;
               
                 to
                 giue
                 light
                 to
                 the
                 eyes
                 ,
                 wisdome
                 to
                 the
                 simple
                 ,
                 to
                 conuert
                 the
                 soule
                 ,
                 and
                 reioyce
                 the
                 heart
                 ,
              
               psal
               .
               19.
               7
               ,
               8.
               
               The
               light
               is
               to
               know
               the
               truth
               ,
               wisdome
               to
               discouer
               and
               improoue
               errour
               ;
               conuersion
               ,
               to
               turne
               the
               heart
               and
               correct
               vice
               ;
               the
               reioycing
               is
               to
               take
               delight
               and
               to
               be
               instructed
               and
               goe
               forward
               in
               well
               doing
               .
               Now
               euery
               man
               hath
               not
               neede
               alike
               of
               all
               these
               :
               some
               man
               had
               more
               neede
               of
               knowledge
               to
               be
               instructed
               ,
               other
               of
               conscience
               to
               be
               conuerted
               :
               one
               hath
               greater
               cause
               to
               be
               reformed
               of
               errour
               ,
               &
               other
               to
               be
               reclaimed
               from
               vice
               .
               
               Therefore
               in
               respect
               of
               mens
               diuerse
               and
               particular
               occasions
               ,
               the
               scriptures
               are
               diuersly
               to
               be
               applied
               ,
               and
               accordingly
               to
               be
               singled
               out
               .
            
             
             
               2.
               
               It
               was
               not
               then
               by
               chance
               ,
               that
               our
               Sauiour
               Christ
               opening
               the
               booke
               in
               the
               synagogue
               at
               Nazareth
               vpon
               the
               sabboth
               day
               ,
               did
               light
               vpon
               that
               place
               of
               the
               prophet
               Isai
               ,
               Luk.
               4.
               8.
               or
               that
               Eunuch
               was
               directed
               to
               read
               vpon
               that
               prophecie
               ,
               Act.
               8.
               
               But
               this
               prophet
               ,
               as
               most
               directly
               foreshewing
               Christ
               ,
               was
               sorted
               out
               ,
               as
               fittest
               to
               instruct
               them
               ,
               that
               yet
               did
               not
               beleeue
               on
               Christ.
               The
               same
               reason
               mooued
               Ambrose
               to
               commend
               vnto
               Augustine
               ,
               
               as
               yet
               but
               a
               newe
               conuert
               ,
               the
               reading
               of
               this
               prophet
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               like
               as
               though
               all
               meates
               be
               wholsom
               in
               their
               kind
               ,
               yet
               are
               they
               not
               fit
               for
               euery
               stomacke
               ;
               but
               a
               man
               of
               discretion
               will
               haue
               a
               care
               of
               his
               diet
               :
               &
               sitting
               at
               a
               great
               mans
               table
               (
               where
               is
               varietie
               of
               dishes
               )
               will
               consider
               diligently
               what
               is
               set
               before
               him
               ,
               Prou.
               23.
               1.
               
               The
               like
               iudgement
               should
               euery
               one
               bring
               to
               the
               reading
               of
               Scripture
               :
               as
               in
               an
               Apothecaries
               shop
               ,
               though
               euery
               drug
               haue
               his
               vse
               ,
               yet
               are
               they
               not
               to
               be
               ministred
               for
               euery
               disease
               :
               so
               the
               word
               of
               God
               must
               be
               applied
               according
               to
               the
               diuers
               maladies
               of
               the
               soule
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               reason
               why
               the
               Lord
               hath
               thus
               tempered
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               the
               Apostle
               
               sheweth
               :
               
                 That
                 the
                 man
                 of
                 God
                 may
                 be
                 absolute
                 ,
                 beeing
                 made
                 perfect
                 to
                 euery
                 good
                 worke
                 ,
              
               2.
               
               Timoth.
               3.
               17.
               
               That
               from
               the
               rich
               treasure
               of
               Gods
               word
               we
               may
               draw
               for
               euery
               occasion
               :
               as
               the
               wise
               Scribe
               taught
               vnto
               Gods
               kingdome
               ,
               is
               as
               a
               wise
               housholder
               ,
               that
               hath
               in
               his
               store-house
               both
               newe
               &
               old
               ,
               Math.
               13.
               52.
               both
               old
               experience
               of
               Gods
               mercies
               to
               comfort
               him
               ;
               
                 I
                 remembred
                 thy
                 iudgements
                 of
                 olde
                 and
                 receiued
                 cōfort
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               119.
               52.
               and
               newe
               examples
               of
               Gods
               iustice
               to
               humble
               him
               ,
               as
               the
               Prophet
               againe
               saith
               :
               
                 Feare
                 is
                 come
                 vpon
                 me
                 for
                 the
                 wicked
                 that
                 forsake
                 thy
                 law
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               119.
               53.
               
               In
               the
               scriptures
               ,
               there
               is
               milke
               for
               babes
               ,
               and
               strong
               meate
               for
               the
               riper
               age
               :
               there
               is
               instruction
               for
               the
               simple
               ,
               &
               meditation
               for
               the
               deeper
               wit.
               Augustine
               saith
               well
               ,
               
                 Pascimur
                 apertis
                 ,
                 exercemur
                 obscuris
                 ,
                 ibi
                 fames
                 ,
                 hic
                 fastidium
                 tollitur
                 :
                 We
                 are
                 nourished
                 with
                 the
                 easier
                 ,
                 and
                 exercised
                 by
                 the
                 harder
                 places
                 of
                 scripture
                 :
                 there
                 are
                 we
                 kept
                 from
                 famishing
                 ,
                 here
                 from
                 loathing
                 .
              
            
             
               5.
               
               Let
               euery
               man
               then
               learne
               ,
               when
               he
               readeth
               or
               heareth
               the
               worde
               ,
               to
               sort
               out
               that
               ,
               which
               is
               most
               for
               his
               vse
               :
               to
               lay
               vp
               places
               of
               comfort
               against
               the
               day
               of
               affliction
               :
               if
               he
               feele
               his
               heart
               to
               be
               dull
               ,
               to
               quicken
               it
               with
               the
               sense
               of
               Gods
               iudgements
               .
               
               Thus
               the
               Prophet
               Dauid
               teacheth
               vs
               to
               single
               out
               scripture
               ,
               where
               he
               giueth
               this
               note
               
                 (
                 Selah
                 )
              
               in
               diuerse
               places
               of
               the
               psalmes
               :
               as
               thrice
               in
               the
               3.
               psalme
               ,
               v.
               2.
               4.
               8.
               which
               is
               a
               marke
               of
               attention
               ,
               whereby
               he
               would
               haue
               those
               sentences
               so
               marked
               ,
               especially
               regarded
               .
               And
               in
               the
               same
               sense
               are
               these
               called
               excellent
               psalmes
               ,
               because
               of
               their
               excellent
               matter
               ,
               and
               necessarie
               vse
               .
            
             
               Whole
               men
               neglect
               this
               course
               ,
               not
               knowing
               their
               owne
               necessities
               ,
               neither
               set
               apart
               the
               spirituall
               food
               of
               the
               word
               ,
               but
               take
               it
               as
               in
               a
               whole
               lumpe
               :
               
               they
               misse
               of
               the
               right
               vse
               of
               scripture
               ,
               and
               defraud
               their
               owne
               soules
               .
               Ye
               shall
               haue
               some
               ,
               that
               had
               neede
               to
               be
               humbled
               ,
               and
               as
               yet
               know
               not
               themselues
               ,
               dwelling
               and
               delighting
               in
               their
               sinnes
               ,
               and
               yet
               forsooth
               ,
               these
               men
               cannot
               endure
               the
               law
               ,
               euery
               thing
               hath
               an
               harsh
               sound
               in
               their
               eare
               ,
               that
               rellisheth
               not
               of
               the
               sweete
               com●orts
               of
               the
               gospel
               .
               Like
               as
               it
               is
               not
               good
               to
               eate
               too
               much
               honie
               .
               Prou.
               25.
               16.
               so
               neither
               is
               it
               fit
               for
               such
               alwaies
               to
               tast
               of
               the
               sweetnes
               of
               Gods
               promises
               .
               And
               as
               Augustine
               saith
               well
               of
               Iudas
               ,
               
               
                 mustum
                 sancti
                 spiritus
                 potare
                 non
                 potui●
                 ,
                 quo
                 accepto
                 continuo
                 crepuit
                 :
                 he
                 could
                 not
                 drinke
                 the
                 sweete
                 liquour
                 of
                 the
                 spirit
                 ,
                 
                 but
                 after
                 he
                 had
                 receiued
                 it
                 ,
                 he
                 burst
                 :
              
               So
               impenitent
               persons
               ,
               and
               such
               as
               are
               hardened
               in
               their
               sinnes
               ,
               when
               they
               heare
               of
               nothing
               but
               
                 peace
                 ,
                 peace
                 ,
              
               are
               thereby
               made
               more
               incurable
               :
               and
               their
               wounds
               are
               not
               purged
               ,
               but
               putrified
               .
               It
               is
               fit
               therefore
               for
               euery
               man
               ,
               as
               his
               disease
               is
               ,
               so
               to
               applie
               the
               medecine
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               4.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               v.
               1.
               
               
                 I
                 reioyced
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 said
                 vnto
                 me
                 .
                 Let
                 vs
                 goe
                 vp
                 into
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 the
                 Lord.
                 ]
              
               This
               princely
               prophet
               reioyceth
               in
               the
               publike
               and
               peaceable
               exercise
               of
               religion
               ,
               
               that
               the
               people
               of
               God
               had
               now
               free
               recourse
               vnto
               the
               house
               of
               God.
               And
               indeede
               ,
               this
               is
               a
               benefit
               wherein
               all
               Christian
               people
               are
               much
               to
               ioy
               ,
               that
               they
               are
               not
               exiled
               from
               Gods
               house
               ,
               but
               may
               chearefully
               and
               quietly
               thither
               assemble
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               So
               saith
               the
               prophet
               Dauid
               ,
               
                 Blessed
                 are
                 they
                 ,
                 that
                 dwell
                 in
                 thy
                 house
                 ,
                 they
                 will
                 euer
                 praise
                 thee
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               84.
               4.
               
               Therefore
               our
               Sauiour
               noteth
               this
               ,
               as
               a
               fearefull
               signe
               of
               future
               miseries
               ,
               
                 when
                 they
                 shall
                 see
                 the
                 abomination
                 of
                 desolation
                 standing
                 in
                 the
                 holy
                 place
                 :
                 then
                 let
                 them
                 that
                 be
                 in
                 Iudea
                 flie
                 vnto
                 the
                 mountaines
                 ,
              
               Math.
               24.
               15.
               
               When
               the
               holy
               
               place
               of
               Gods
               worship
               beginneth
               to
               be
               desolate
               and
               forsaken
               ,
               what
               comfort
               can
               elswhere
               be
               expected
               ?
            
             
               2.
               
               Therefore
               Dauid
               desireth
               this
               as
               first
               and
               principall
               aboue
               all
               other
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               dwell
               in
               Gods
               tabernacle
               all
               the
               daies
               of
               his
               life
               ,
               Psal.
               27.
               4.
               
               And
               he
               professeth
               ,
               that
               he
               had
               rather
               be
               one
               day
               in
               Gods
               courts
               ,
               then
               a
               thousand
               els
               where
               ,
               Psal.
               84.
               10.
               
               And
               he
               powreth
               out
               his
               heart
               for
               griefe
               ,
               when
               he
               remembred
               how
               he
               had
               gone
               vp
               with
               the
               people
               to
               Gods
               house
               ,
               as
               a
               multitude
               keeping
               a
               feast
               ,
               Psal.
               42.
               4.
               but
               now
               was
               tossed
               from
               place
               to
               place
               ,
               and
               banished
               from
               that
               place
               of
               ioy
               and
               comfort
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               people
               of
               God
               flocking
               togither
               to
               Gods
               house
               ,
               are
               resembled
               to
               doues
               ,
               that
               flie
               in
               at
               their
               windowes
               ,
               Isa.
               60.
               8.
               
               &
               as
               birds
               ,
               that
               flicker
               to
               their
               nests
               ,
               Psal.
               84.
               3.
               
               So
               euen
               as
               the
               sparrowes
               and
               swallowes
               beeing
               chased
               ,
               doe
               resort
               vnto
               their
               nests
               ;
               so
               the
               house
               of
               God
               is
               a
               place
               of
               rest
               to
               a
               troubled
               soule
               .
               And
               as
               in
               the
               poole
               of
               Bethesda
               ,
               the
               lame
               and
               diseased
               ,
               when
               the
               waters
               were
               stirred
               by
               the
               angel
               ,
               found
               remedie
               for
               their
               disease
               :
               so
               in
               Gods
               house
               the
               waters
               of
               life
               doe
               issue
               forth
               to
               the
               health
               of
               all
               ,
               that
               thirst
               after
               them
               .
            
             
             
               4.
               
               Great
               cause
               then
               haue
               the
               people
               of
               God
               to
               frequent
               the
               Lords
               Sanctuarie
               :
               because
               the
               Lord
               sitteth
               betweene
               the
               Cherubins
               ,
               Psal.
               99.
               1.
               
               Gods
               way
               is
               in
               the
               Sanctuarie
               ,
               Psal.
               77.
               13.
               
               Gods
               power
               and
               beautie
               are
               in
               his
               Sanctuarie
               ,
               Psal.
               96.
               6.
               who
               then
               would
               not
               desire
               to
               enioy
               God●
               presence
               ;
               to
               behold
               the
               beautie
               of
               his
               face
               ;
               to
               see
               the
               Lord
               in
               his
               word
               ;
               to
               tast
               him
               in
               the
               sacraments
               ,
               to
               feele
               him
               by
               the
               operation
               of
               his
               spirit
               ,
               to
               talke
               with
               him
               by
               praier
               ?
            
             
               5.
               
               Wherefore
               we
               all
               this
               day
               are
               much
               bound
               to
               giue
               thankes
               to
               God
               ,
               that
               in
               his
               mercie
               still
               graunteth
               vs
               to
               haue
               free
               accesse
               to
               his
               temple
               .
               
               This
               gratious
               entercourse
               of
               religion
               ,
               we
               had
               iust
               cause
               in
               respect
               of
               our
               sinnes
               to
               feare
               ,
               least
               it
               might
               haue
               beene
               stopped
               :
               but
               God
               hath
               giuen
               vnto
               his
               gospel
               in
               this
               land
               an
               open
               doore
               againe
               ,
               which
               should
               haue
               beene
               for
               euer
               shut
               vp
               vnto
               vs
               ,
               if
               the
               Popes
               curses
               ,
               and
               Papists
               wishes
               ,
               and
               Iebusites
               practises
               could
               haue
               preuailed
               .
               How
               good
               yet
               and
               louing
               is
               God
               to
               Israel
               ?
               in
               many
               countries
               to
               this
               day
               Gods
               house
               is
               desolate
               ,
               and
               his
               true
               worship
               abolished
               :
               they
               which
               feare
               God
               are
               driuen
               to
               heare
               the
               word
               in
               corners
               ,
               in
               woodes
               and
               solitarie
               places
               :
               O
               
               therefore
               let
               vs
               reioyce
               in
               England
               ,
               that
               we
               may
               safely
               goe
               vp
               to
               Gods
               house
               .
               Some
               ,
               while
               they
               haue
               beene
               seruing
               God
               in
               his
               house
               ,
               haue
               beene
               robbed
               and
               spoiled
               at
               home
               :
               some
               in
               the
               Church
               haue
               beene
               put
               to
               the
               sword
               ,
               the
               house
               hath
               beene
               fired
               ouer
               their
               heads
               ;
               their
               blood
               shed
               in
               the
               sanctuarie
               ,
               as
               the
               Galileans
               blood
               was
               mingled
               with
               their
               sacrifice
               ,
               Luk.
               13.
               1.
               
               Thus
               we
               read
               that
               20.
               thousand
               Christians
               in
               Nicomedia
               were
               burnt
               ,
               
               beeing
               all
               assembled
               in
               the
               Church
               to
               celebrate
               the
               natiuitie
               of
               Christ
               ,
               vnder
               the
               cruel
               persecution
               of
               Dioclesian
               :
               Thus
               cruell
               Miniers
               ,
               
               commaunded
               his
               captaine
               Iohn
               de
               Gaxe
               ,
               to
               put
               diuers
               of
               the
               Merindoliās
               to
               the
               sword
               ,
               which
               were
               gathered
               togither
               in
               the
               Church
               :
               Hierome
               also
               maketh
               mention
               in
               his
               time
               ,
               
               how
               that
               at
               Ments
               in
               Germanie
               ,
               the
               cittie
               beeing
               taken
               ,
               diuers
               thousands
               were
               slaine
               in
               the
               Church
               .
               Thankes
               be
               to
               God
               wee
               neither
               feele
               ,
               nor
               see
               any
               of
               these
               euils
               .
               Wherefore
               my
               brethren
               ,
               let
               vs
               loue
               Gods
               house
               ,
               and
               make
               much
               of
               this
               blessing
               ,
               while
               we
               may
               :
               let
               no
               man
               contemne
               or
               neglect
               the
               holy
               assemblies
               ;
               let
               not
               any
               worldly
               businesse
               drawe
               vs
               from
               the
               house
               of
               praier
               ,
               let
               not
               vaine
               pleasure
               hinder
               vs.
               How
               many
               are
               there
               ,
               
               that
               of
               purpose
               put
               off
               their
               iourneys
               to
               the
               Lords
               day
               ,
               thinking
               the
               time
               gained
               ,
               that
               is
               spared
               from
               the
               exercises
               of
               religion
               ?
               How
               many
               ,
               that
               sit
               quaffing
               and
               tipling
               ,
               trifling
               and
               toying
               ,
               when
               they
               should
               present
               themselues
               before
               God
               ?
               Let
               these
               things
               be
               nowe
               amended
               ,
               and
               let
               vs
               begin
               to
               reioyce
               ,
               that
               the
               Gospel
               hath
               yet
               a
               free
               passage
               among
               vs
               ;
               and
               lay
               we
               vp
               in
               our
               store-house
               plentie
               of
               spirituall
               instruction
               against
               the
               euill
               day
               :
               The
               wise
               man
               sendeth
               vs
               to
               the
               Pismire
               ,
               
                 Goe
                 to
                 the
                 Ant
                 thou
                 sluggard
                 ,
                 behold
                 her
                 waies
                 and
                 be
                 wise
                 ,
              
               Prou.
               6.
               4.
               which
               similitude
               Augustine
               doeth
               very
               fitly
               thus
               explicate
               :
               
                 Vide
                 formicam
                 Dei
                 ,
                 surgit
                 quotidie
                 ,
                 currit
                 ad
                 Ecclesiam
                 Dei
                 ,
                 audit
                 lectionem
                 ,
                 recondit
                 intus
                 grana
                 electa
                 de
                 horreo
                 .
              
               
               
                 Behold
                 Gods
                 Ant
                 ,
                 he
                 riseth
                 daily
                 ,
                 goeth
                 to
                 Church
                 ,
                 heareth
                 the
                 word
                 ,
                 laieth
                 vp
                 the
                 cheifest
                 cornes
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 The
                 time
                 of
                 winter
                 commeth
                 ,
                 some
                 euill
                 or
                 crosse
                 befalleth
                 him
                 ,
                 modo
                 intus
                 formica
                 comedit
                 labores
                 aestat
                 is
                 ;
                 now
                 he
                 doth
                 within
                 to
                 himselfe
                 enioy
                 the
                 gatherings
                 of
                 summer
                 .
              
               Let
               vs
               in
               like
               sort
               learne
               wisdome
               of
               the
               Ant
               ,
               nowe
               while
               we
               may
               ,
               to
               lay
               vp
               store
               of
               spirituall
               foode
               in
               the
               granaries
               of
               our
               hearts
               ,
               that
               we
               may
               be
               prouided
               against
               the
               time
               of
               dearth
               &
               famine
               come
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               The
               5.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 Let
                 vs
                 goe
                 ,
                 or
                 ,
                 we
                 will
                 goe
                 into
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 the
                 Lord.
                 ]
              
               The
               people
               did
               encourage
               one
               another
               to
               goe
               vp
               to
               Gods
               house
               :
               whereby
               we
               are
               taught
               ,
               that
               it
               is
               euery
               mans
               part
               ,
               to
               helpe
               forward
               his
               brother
               ,
               and
               to
               stirre
               him
               vp
               vnto
               the
               exercise
               of
               godlinesse
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Thus
               Isay
               prophesied
               of
               the
               last
               times
               :
               
                 Many
                 people
                 shall
                 say
                 ,
                 come
                 ,
                 and
                 let
                 vs
                 goe
                 vp
                 to
                 the
                 mountaine
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
              
               Isay
               ,
               5.
               3.
               
               Saint
               Paul
               also
               mooueth
               the
               brethren
               one
               to
               comfort
               another
               ,
               ●
               .
               Thess.
               4.
               18.
               
               
                 One
                 to
                 exhort
                 and
                 edifie
                 another
                 ,
              
               1.
               
               Thess.
               5.
               11.
               
               Neither
               yet
               ,
               where
               Ieremie
               saith
               :
               
                 in
                 those
                 daies
                 ,
                 they
                 shall
                 teach
                 no
                 more
                 euery
                 man
                 his
                 neighbour
                 ,
                 and
                 euery
                 man
                 his
                 brother
                 ,
                 saying
                 ,
                 know
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
              
               Ierem.
               31.
               34.
               is
               this
               prophet
               contrarie
               to
               Esay
               :
               but
               this
               saying
               must
               be
               vnderstood
               comparatiuely
               ;
               that
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               aboundance
               of
               knoweledge
               vnder
               Christ
               ,
               there
               shall
               not
               be
               such
               neede
               of
               mutuall
               instruction
               ,
               as
               was
               before
               vnder
               the
               lawe
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               Iacob
               encouraged
               his
               seruāts
               and
               whole
               familie
               ,
               
                 Clense
                 your selues
                 and
                 change
                 your
                 garments
                 ,
                 we
                 will
                 rise
                 vp
                 and
                 goe
                 to
                 Bethel
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 will
                 make
                 an
                 altar
                 there
                 vnto
                 
                 God
                 ,
              
               Gen.
               35.
               2
               ,
               3.
               
               The
               shepheards
               vnto
               whome
               the
               angels
               declared
               the
               glad
               tidings
               of
               the
               birth
               of
               Christ
               ,
               said
               one
               to
               another
               :
               
                 Let
                 vs
                 goe
                 vnto
                 Bethlem
                 ,
                 and
                 see
                 this
                 thing
                 that
                 is
                 come
                 to
                 passe
                 ,
              
               Luk.
               2.
               15.
               
               Thus
               Andrew
               brought
               Peter
               ,
               and
               Philip
               Nathaniel
               vnto
               Christ
               ,
               Ioh.
               1.
               41.
               45.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Like
               as
               then
               ,
               
                 two
                 are
                 better
                 then
                 one
                 ,
              
               (
               as
               the
               Preacher
               saith
               )
               
                 if
                 they
                 fall
                 one
                 will
                 lift
                 vp
                 the
                 other
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 If
                 two
                 sleepe
                 togither
                 ,
                 they
                 shall
                 haue
                 heate
                 ,
              
               Eccles.
               4.
               10.
               15.
               
               So
               by
               the
               fellowship
               of
               brethren
               ,
               and
               their
               mutuall
               exhortations
               ,
               zeale
               is
               increased
               ,
               and
               spirituall
               strength
               augmented
               .
               And
               as
               in
               the
               bodie
               one
               member
               helpeth
               another
               ,
               and
               doe
               communicate
               their
               offices
               ;
               so
               should
               we
               ,
               beeing
               one
               bodie
               in
               Christ
               ,
               seeke
               and
               procure
               the
               good
               one
               of
               another
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               See
               we
               not
               the
               wicked
               howe
               they
               one
               prouoke
               another
               to
               mischeife
               ,
               and
               entise
               vnto
               euill
               ?
               
                 Come
                 ,
                 we
                 will
                 lay
                 waite
                 for
                 blood
                 ,
                 &c.
                 cast
                 in
                 thy
                 lot
                 among
                 vs
                 ,
                 we
                 will
                 haue
                 all
                 one
                 purse
                 ,
              
               Prou.
               1.
               11
               ,
               14.
               
               They
               do
               claspe
               togither
               as
               briers
               ,
               Mich.
               7.
               4.
               
               Much
               more
               should
               Christians
               one
               stirre
               vp
               and
               prouoke
               another
               to
               goodnesse
               .
            
             
               
                 For
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 propertie
                 of
                 charitie
                 ,
                 it
                 seeketh
                 not
                 her
                 owne
                 things
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Cor.
              
               13.
               1.
               
               
                 it
                 desireth
                 to
                 impart
                 ,
                 what
                 gift
                 soeuer
                 it
                 hath
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 good
                 of
                 many
                 :
                 as
                 Bernard
                 well
                 noteth
                 ,
                 vpon
                 the
                 134.
                 
                 Psalme
                 :
              
               It
               is
               like
               to
               the
               pretious
               ointment
               vpon
               the
               head
               ,
               that
               runneth
               downe
               vpon
               the
               beard
               ,
               euen
               vpon
               Aarōs
               beard
               ,
               which
               went
               downe
               vpon
               the
               border
               of
               his
               garments
               :
               Non
               remaneat
               in
               barba
               Aaron
               tota
               vnctio
               salutaris
               ;
               
               capiat
               sane
               prima
               ,
               non
               sola
               ,
               refundat
               &
               inferioribus
               membris
               ,
               quod
               accepit
               ipsa
               desuper
               .
               Let
               not
               the
               wholesome
               annointing
               stay
               in
               Aarons
               beard
               ,
               let
               it
               receiue
               it
               first
               ,
               but
               not
               alone
               ,
               but
               shed
               forth
               to
               the
               mēbers
               belowe
               ,
               which
               it
               hath
               receiued
               from
               aboue
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               By
               this
               doctrine
               then
               ,
               the
               great
               negligence
               of
               people
               is
               reprooued
               ,
               which
               suffer
               euery
               one
               to
               walke
               his
               owne
               way
               :
               no
               man
               exhorteth
               ,
               admonisheth
               one
               another
               :
               but
               like
               as
               ,
               if
               thou
               shouldst
               see
               thy
               brother
               readie
               to
               fall
               into
               a
               pit
               ,
               which
               he
               was
               not
               ware
               of
               ,
               and
               forbearest
               to
               tell
               him
               ,
               thou
               art
               accessarie
               to
               his
               danger
               :
               so
               saith
               Augustine
               ,
               
                 Praecipitat
                 se
                 quis
                 in
                 vitia
                 sua
                 ,
                 praedicat
                 apud
                 te
                 malefacta
                 sua
                 ,
                 tu
                 nosti
                 mala
                 esse
                 &
                 laudas
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Thou
                 seest
                 a
                 man
                 to
                 run
                 headlong
                 vnto
                 sinne
                 ,
              
               
               
                 he
                 vaunteth
                 of
                 his
                 wickednesse
                 before
                 thee
                 ,
                 thou
                 knowest
                 he
                 doeth
                 euill
                 ,
                 and
                 yet
                 doest
                 not
                 tell
                 him
                 :
              
               thou
               art
               guiltie
               of
               his
               perishing
               .
               The
               time
               was
               ,
               while
               Poperie
               raigned
               ,
               
               that
               Christians
               could
               not
               meete
               to
               conferre
               togither
               ,
               one
               to
               exhort
               and
               admonish
               another
               without
               danger
               of
               their
               liues
               :
               as
               Iames
               Brewster
               ,
               for
               hearing
               one
               Sweeting
               to
               read
               māy
               good
               things
               out
               of
               a
               booke
               :
               and
               because
               the
               said
               Sweeting
               ,
               when
               Iames
               had
               said
               ,
               The
               sonne
               of
               the
               liuing
               God
               helpe
               vs
               ,
               
               answered
               ,
               Now
               almightie
               God
               so
               doe
               ,
               were
               both
               condemned
               and
               burnt
               in
               Smithfield
               .
            
             
               
                 Ioannes
                 de
                 Cadurco
                 ,
              
               for
               bringing
               forth
               this
               sentence
               at
               a
               feast
               ,
               
               Christ
               raigne
               in
               our
               hearts
               ,
               and
               prosecuting
               it
               by
               Scriptures
               ,
               was
               burned
               .
               ann
               .
               1533.
               
            
             
               Thomas
               Saupaulinus
               ,
               because
               he
               rebuked
               one
               for
               swearing
               ,
               
               was
               suspected
               for
               a
               Lutherane
               ,
               and
               burned
               at
               Paris
               .
               ann
               .
               1551.
               
            
             
               This
               was
               the
               miserable
               thrall
               of
               Christs
               Church
               in
               those
               blind
               sottish
               daies
               ;
               but
               now
               blessed
               be
               God
               ,
               these
               45.
               yeares
               it
               hath
               beene
               lawefull
               for
               Christians
               to
               vse
               godly
               conference
               ,
               
               and
               mutuall
               exhortation
               ,
               and
               I
               trust
               this
               libertie
               shall
               contiuue
               still
               twice
               so
               many
               yeares
               ,
               and
               I
               hope
               to
               the
               worlds
               ende
               .
               This
               benefit
               if
               it
               be
               not
               cheerefully
               vsed
               ,
               it
               shall
               be
               the
               peoples
               fault
               ,
               not
               want
               of
               Christian
               freedome
               and
               libertie
               therein
               .
               But
               it
               is
               no
               great
               maruell
               ,
               
               that
               the
               common
               people
               neglect
               this
               mutuall
               dutie
               ,
               seeing
               they
               which
               haue
               charge
               ouer
               others
               ,
               as
               fathers
               ouer
               children
               ,
               masters
               ouer
               seruants
               ,
               do
               faile
               in
               this
               behalfe
               ;
               the
               most
               part
               of
               these
               ,
               leauing
               those
               whōe
               they
               are
               charged
               with
               to
               their
               owne
               election
               ,
               and
               sway
               of
               their
               simple
               wit
               :
               Let
               these
               also
               knowe
               ,
               that
               God
               will
               require
               their
               blood
               ,
               which
               perish
               by
               their
               negligence
               ,
               at
               their
               hands
               .
               Let
               them
               remember
               how
               seuerely
               Elie
               ,
               otherwise
               a
               good
               man
               ,
               was
               punished
               in
               himselfe
               and
               his
               posteritie
               ,
               for
               his
               remisnesse
               toward
               his
               children
               ,
               1.
               
               Sam.
               2.
               
               And
               so
               I
               conclude
               this
               place
               ,
               with
               that
               golden
               sentence
               of
               Augustine
               :
               
                 Adduc
                 eos
                 ad
                 domum
                 dei
                 tecum
                 ▪
              
               
               
                 qui
                 sunt
                 in
                 domo
                 tua
                 t●cum
                 ,
                 mater
                 ecclesia
                 aliquos
                 à
                 te
                 petit
                 ,
                 aliquos
                 repetit
                 ,
                 petit
                 eos
                 ,
                 quos
                 apud
                 te
                 invenit
                 ,
                 repetit
                 eos
                 ,
                 quos
                 per
                 te
                 perdidit
                 ,
                 acquirat
                 solers
                 quos
                 non
                 habuit
                 ,
                 non
                 plāgat
                 ,
                 quos
                 habuit
                 :
                 Bring
                 those
                 vnto
                 Gods
                 house
                 with
                 thee
                 ,
                 which
                 thou
                 hast
                 in
                 thine
                 owne
                 house
                 with
                 thee
                 :
                 the
                 mother
                 Church
                 doeth
                 craue
                 some
                 of
                 thee
                 ,
                 other
                 shee
                 doth
                 challenge
                 :
                 shee
                 craueth
                 those
                 which
                 shee
                 findeth
                 with
                 thee
                 ,
                 shee
                 challengeth
                 those
                 which
                 shee
                 hath
                 lost
                 by
                 thee
                 :
                 let
                 her
                 get
                 what
                 shee
                 had
                 not
                 ,
                 not
                 grieue
                 for
                 that
                 shee
                 had
                 .
              
               Wherefore
               masters
               ,
               fathers
               ,
               and
               gouernours
               should
               rather
               seeke
               by
               their
               
               godly
               care
               to
               winne
               those
               vnto
               God
               ,
               that
               belong
               vnto
               them
               ,
               then
               pull
               them
               by
               their
               negligence
               from
               God
               ,
               for
               whome
               they
               are
               accomptable
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               6.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 house
                 of
                 Iehovah
                 ]
              
               This
               is
               a
               great
               honour
               ,
               which
               the
               Lord
               vouchsafeth
               vnto
               such
               places
               ,
               as
               are
               dedicated
               to
               his
               worship
               ,
               that
               they
               are
               the
               Lords
               houses
               and
               dwelling
               places
               :
               that
               though
               heauen
               and
               earth
               cannot
               containe
               that
               infinite
               maiestie
               ,
               yet
               he
               is
               present
               among
               the
               faithfull
               assembled
               together
               in
               his
               house
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 Thus
                 the
                 Lord
                 saith
                 by
                 his
                 Prophet
                 ,
              
               Heauen
               is
               my
               seate
               ,
               earth
               is
               my
               footestoole
               :
               where
               is
               that
               house
               that
               ye
               will
               build
               for
               me
               ?
               To
               whome
               will
               I
               looke
               ,
               to
               him
               that
               is
               poore
               and
               of
               a
               contrite
               heart
               ,
               and
               trembleth
               at
               my
               words
               ,
               
                 Isa.
                 66.
                 1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 So
                 our
                 Sauiour
                 Christ
                 promiseth
                 ,
              
               Wheresoeuer
               two
               or
               three
               are
               gathered
               together
               in
               my
               name
               ,
               there
               am
               I
               in
               the
               midst
               among
               them
               ,
               
                 Math.
              
               18.
               20.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Iacob
               hereof
               had
               experience
               ,
               when
               in
               his
               dreame
               he
               saw
               that
               comfortable
               vision
               of
               the
               ladder
               ,
               and
               awaking
               called
               it
               Gods
               house
               ,
               and
               the
               gate
               of
               heauen
               ,
               Gen.
               28.
               17.
               
               Salomon
               by
               his
               holy
               praier
               at
               the
               
               dedication
               of
               the
               temple
               ,
               obtained
               that
               God
               would
               be
               there
               present
               ,
               and
               heare
               the
               supplications
               of
               the
               people
               that
               should
               pray
               in
               that
               place
               .
               2.
               
               King.
               8.
               30.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Like
               as
               then
               the
               curtaines
               of
               the
               Temple
               was
               pictured
               with
               Cherubs
               faces
               ,
               Exod.
               36.
               8.
               so
               are
               the
               Angels
               of
               God
               present
               as
               ministring
               spirits
               for
               the
               Elect
               sake
               ,
               when
               the
               people
               of
               God
               are
               assembled
               in
               praier
               :
               and
               as
               the
               tabernacle
               of
               Moses
               was
               shadowed
               with
               a
               cloud
               ,
               an
               euident
               signe
               of
               Gods
               presence
               ,
               Num.
               9.
               22.
               so
               the
               Lord
               doeth
               ouershadowe
               by
               the
               worke
               of
               his
               spirit
               the
               hearts
               of
               the
               faithfull
               assembled
               in
               his
               house
               to
               heare
               his
               word
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               God
               therefore
               is
               present
               in
               his
               house
               because
               of
               his
               promise
               :
               for
               there
               the
               Lord
               will
               be
               seene
               ,
               as
               Abraham
               said
               ;
               
                 In
                 the
                 mountaine
                 will
                 God
                 be
                 seene
                 ,
              
               Gen.
               22.
               14.
               so
               will
               the
               Lord
               shew
               himselfe
               in
               his
               sanctuarie
               ,
               promising
               there
               to
               heare
               the
               praiers
               of
               his
               people
               .
               And
               againe
               ,
               where
               els
               should
               the
               Lord
               be
               thought
               to
               be
               present
               ,
               then
               where
               he
               bestoweth
               his
               gifts
               :
               as
               it
               is
               saide
               in
               the
               parable
               of
               the
               prodigall
               child
               ;
               
                 In
                 my
                 fathers
                 house
                 is
                 bread
                 enough
                 ,
              
               luk
               .
               15.
               
               Therefore
               because
               the
               store
               of
               this
               spirituall
               bread
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               word
               of
               God
               
               preached
               ,
               is
               dealt
               in
               the
               Church
               assemblies
               ,
               that
               there
               is
               surely
               our
               fathers
               house
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               ,
               here
               all
               superstitious
               persons
               must
               be
               met
               withall
               ,
               
               which
               tie
               Gods
               presence
               to
               the
               walls
               &
               stones
               of
               the
               church
               ,
               as
               though
               it
               were
               in
               it selfe
               a
               more
               holy
               place
               :
               such
               were
               the
               Israelites
               ,
               that
               thought
               the
               very
               presence
               of
               the
               Arke
               would
               deliuer
               them
               from
               the
               Philistims
               ,
               when
               as
               God
               was
               not
               present
               ,
               whome
               they
               had
               chased
               away
               with
               their
               sinnes
               ,
               1.
               
               Sam
               4.
               
               And
               they
               had
               nothing
               in
               their
               mouth
               ,
               but
               
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
              
               Ierem.
               7.
               4.
               foolishly
               imagining
               ,
               that
               what
               sinnes
               so
               euer
               they
               had
               committed
               ,
               if
               they
               did
               but
               once
               come
               within
               the
               walls
               of
               the
               temple
               they
               were
               deliuered
               ,
               Ier.
               7.
               10.
               
               Such
               is
               the
               superstition
               which
               the
               Papists
               haue
               of
               their
               hallowed
               Churches
               ,
               ascribing
               great
               vertue
               to
               the
               place
               it selfe
               :
               whereas
               the
               Lord
               for
               his
               worship
               maketh
               no
               difference
               of
               places
               ,
               but
               euery
               where
               he
               is
               accepted
               ,
               which
               worshippeth
               in
               spirit
               and
               truth
               ,
               Ioh.
               4.
               23
               ,
               24.
               
               Churches
               indeede
               are
               holy
               places
               ,
               but
               not
               in
               respect
               of
               any
               inherent
               holines
               ,
               but
               because
               of
               the
               holy
               vse
               ,
               namely
               the
               holy
               praiers
               and
               exercises
               of
               holy
               assemblies
               :
               which
               point
               is
               very
               well
               touched
               by
               Bernard
               ,
               
                 Habent
                 
                 sanctitatem
                 ,
                 sed
                 propter
                 corpora
                 vestra
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Your
                 Churches
                 are
                 holy
                 because
                 of
                 your
                 bodies
                 ,
              
               
               
                 as
                 your
                 soules
                 are
                 holy
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 spirit
                 that
                 dwelleth
                 in
                 you
                 ,
                 your
                 bodies
                 holy
                 because
                 of
                 your
                 soules
                 ,
                 so
                 this
                 house
                 is
                 holy
                 because
                 of
                 your
                 bodies
                 .
              
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               all
               profanation
               of
               Gods
               house
               is
               forbidden
               ,
               
               or
               turning
               of
               it
               to
               any
               secular
               vses
               .
               Our
               Sauiour
               would
               not
               suffer
               them
               to
               carrie
               a
               vessell
               through
               the
               Temple
               ,
               nor
               to
               buie
               and
               sell
               ,
               but
               ouerthrew
               the
               tables
               of
               the
               money
               changers
               ,
               Math.
               11.
               15
               ,
               16.
               
               Hereof
               it
               is
               that
               diuerse
               abuses
               of
               places
               consecrate
               to
               religious
               vses
               ,
               haue
               beene
               by
               diuers
               wholesome
               Canons
               restrained
               :
               that
               law-daies
               should
               not
               be
               kept
               in
               Churches
               ,
               
                 Concil
                 .
                 Aretalens
                 .
                 sub
                 .
                 Carol.
                 c.
              
               22.
               that
               feasts
               be
               not
               made
               there
               ,
               
                 Trullan
                 .
                 c.
              
               74.
               that
               no
               man
               bring
               in
               beasts
               ,
               or
               cattell
               ,
               
                 ibid.
                 c.
              
               88.
               that
               no
               dancing
               there
               be
               vsed
               ,
               songs
               ,
               or
               enterludes
               ,
               
                 Bracarens
                 .
                 3.
                 c.
              
               2.
               
               All
               which
               ,
               and
               such
               like
               corrupt
               vsages
               ,
               are
               great
               profanations
               of
               Gods
               house
               ,
               which
               is
               appointed
               for
               praier
               ,
               and
               other
               holy
               exercises
               .
            
             
               Thirdly
               ,
               if
               the
               Church
               be
               Gods
               house
               ,
               it
               ought
               euen
               in
               respect
               of
               outward
               comelines
               and
               decencie
               ,
               to
               be
               reuerently
               kept
               .
               Men
               should
               not
               be
               curious
               in
               adorning
               
               their
               owne
               houses
               ,
               and
               dissolute
               in
               maintaining
               the
               house
               of
               God.
               This
               was
               the
               reproofe
               of
               the
               Israelites
               in
               Haggai
               his
               time
               ,
               because
               they
               themselues
               dwelled
               in
               sieled
               houses
               ,
               and
               suffered
               the
               temple
               to
               lie
               wast
               ,
               Hagg.
               1.
               4.
               
               And
               verily
               where
               people
               are
               slouthfull
               in
               this
               busines
               to
               beautifie
               and
               repaire
               the
               publike
               places
               of
               religion
               ,
               it
               sheweth
               that
               they
               much
               regard
               not
               the
               exercises
               of
               that
               holy
               habitation
               .
            
             
               Lastly
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               Gods
               house
               ,
               so
               we
               should
               come
               reuerently
               to
               it
               ,
               as
               into
               Gods
               presence
               ;
               as
               Iacob
               resolueth
               himselfe
               :
               
                 How
                 f●arefull
                 is
                 this
                 place
                 ?
                 this
                 is
                 none
                 other
                 but
                 Gods
                 house
                 ,
              
               Gen.
               28.
               17.
               
               Gods
               palace
               is
               much
               vnlike
               Ahashuerosh
               court
               :
               Mordecai
               could
               not
               enter
               there
               ,
               because
               he
               was
               cloathed
               with
               sackcloath
               ,
               a
               mourning
               garment
               ,
               Esth.
               4.
               2.
               but
               he
               is
               soonest
               admitted
               into
               Gods
               court
               ,
               that
               commeth
               with
               true
               sorrow
               and
               contrition
               .
               Men
               vse
               to
               come
               trembling
               vnto
               the
               princes
               Maiestie
               ,
               and
               with
               reuerence
               enter
               into
               the
               court
               :
               Gods
               house
               in
               like
               manner
               is
               his
               pallace
               :
               
               and
               therfore
               in
               time
               past
               we
               shall
               finde
               ,
               that
               the
               Church
               was
               called
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               a
               basilike
               or
               princes
               house
               .
               
               It
               is
               the
               mansion
               of
               the
               great
               King
               ,
               and
               therefore
               we
               should
               not
               come
               with
               secure
               hearts
               ,
               and
               
               profane
               affections
               ,
               as
               the
               manner
               of
               some
               is
               ,
               but
               with
               reuerence
               and
               feare
               ,
               as
               into
               the
               presence
               of
               the
               highest
               Maiestie
               .
               And
               herein
               we
               haue
               the
               exāple
               of
               our
               princely
               Ecclesiastes
               ,
               that
               both
               in
               practise
               and
               precept
               goeth
               before
               vs
               in
               this
               dutie
               of
               reuerence
               toward
               God
               ,
               thus
               moouing
               &
               aduising
               his
               princely
               sonne
               :
               
               
                 But
                 in
                 your
                 praier
                 to
                 God
                 speake
                 with
                 all
                 reuerence
                 :
                 for
                 if
                 a
                 subiect
                 will
                 not
                 speake
                 but
                 reuerently
                 to
                 a
                 king
                 ,
                 much
                 lesse
                 should
                 any
                 flesh
                 presume
                 to
                 talke
                 with
                 God
                 as
                 a
                 companion
                 .
              
               Howe
               much
               are
               we
               bound
               vnto
               God
               ,
               that
               in
               his
               mercy
               hath
               sent
               vs
               a
               king
               truely
               touched
               with
               the
               deuout
               sense
               of
               religion
               ?
               
               who
               ,
               what
               he
               prescribeth
               to
               others
               ,
               doeth
               first
               practise
               in
               his
               royall
               person
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               Prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 is
                 as
                 an
                 he-goate
                 before
                 the
                 flocke
                 ,
              
               Iere.
               50.
               8.
               that
               is
               ,
               most
               forward
               of
               the
               rest
               .
               To
               conclude
               this
               place
               ,
               Bernard
               well
               saith
               :
               
                 Terribilis
                 plane
                 locus
                 quem
                 fideles
                 viri
                 inhabitant
                 ,
                 quem
                 angeli
                 sancti
                 frequentant
                 ,
                 quem
                 sua
                 quoque
                 praesentia
                 dominus
                 ipse
                 dignatur
                 ,
                 worthie
                 of
                 all
                 reuerence
                 ,
                 which
                 faithfull
                 men
                 inhabite
                 ,
                 angels
                 frequent
                 ,
                 where
                 God
                 himselfe
                 is
                 present
                 .
              
               The
               presence
               of
               Christs
               Church
               requireth
               reuerence
               ,
               but
               of
               angels
               more
               ,
               of
               God
               himselfe
               most
               of
               all
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               The
               7.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               v.
               2.
               
               
                 Our
                 feete
                 shall
                 stand
                 in
                 thy
                 gates
                 .
                 ]
              
               That
               is
               ,
               whereas
               the
               Arke
               before
               was
               flitting
               from
               one
               place
               to
               another
               ,
               not
               onely
               in
               the
               wildernes
               vnder
               Moses
               ,
               where
               the
               Arke
               was
               remooued
               ,
               as
               the
               campe
               pitched
               their
               tents
               ;
               but
               afterwarde
               also
               it
               often
               changed
               place
               :
               
               from
               Shiloh
               to
               Ebenezer
               ,
               from
               Ebenezer
               to
               Ashdod
               ,
               
               from
               thence
               to
               Gath
               ,
               
               from
               Gath
               to
               Ekron
               ,
               
               frō
               thence
               to
               the
               house
               of
               Obed●Edom
               ,
               and
               so
               to
               Ierusalem
               :
               now
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               reioyceth
               that
               the
               Arke
               was
               setled
               and
               brought
               to
               his
               resting
               place
               .
               This
               then
               is
               the
               ioy
               of
               the
               Church
               when
               religion
               is
               setled
               and
               established
               ,
               and
               brought
               to
               perfection
               :
               when
               the
               people
               are
               resolued
               in
               their
               conscience
               of
               the
               truth
               ,
               and
               stand
               confidently
               with
               their
               feete
               in
               Gods
               house
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Thus
               the
               Lord
               promised
               concerning
               Sion
               :
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 hath
                 chosen
                 Sion
                 ,
                 and
                 loued
                 to
                 dwell
                 in
                 it
                 :
                 this
                 is
                 my
                 rest
                 for
                 euer
                 ,
                 here
                 will
                 I
                 dwell
                 ,
                 for
                 I
                 haue
                 a
                 delight
                 therein
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               132.
               13.
               
               Now
               in
               Dauids
               time
               ,
               and
               not
               before
               ,
               the
               place
               was
               elected
               and
               appointed
               ,
               where
               the
               solemne
               exercise
               of
               religion
               should
               be
               practised
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               Salomon
               builded
               God
               an
               
               house
               ,
               whereas
               he
               dwelt
               in
               tents
               before
               ,
               that
               the
               Arke
               should
               be
               no
               more
               transported
               out
               of
               his
               place
               :
               and
               herein
               Salomon
               was
               a
               figure
               of
               Christ
               ,
               in
               whome
               the
               promises
               of
               God
               are
               Yea
               ,
               and
               Amen
               ,
               2.
               
               Cor.
               1.
               20.
               
               
                 Who
                 hath
                 giuen
                 vs
                 an
                 euerlasting
                 testament
                 ,
                 a
                 kingdome
                 ,
                 which
                 cannot
                 be
                 shaken
                 .
              
               Hebr.
               12.
               28.
               who
               is
               the
               true
               Messiah
               ,
               neither
               are
               we
               to
               looke
               for
               any
               other
               .
               Math.
               11.
               3.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Like
               as
               then
               when
               Samuel
               went
               to
               annoint
               Dauid
               ,
               
               first
               Eliab
               ,
               then
               Abinadab
               ,
               then
               Shammah
               ,
               and
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               brethren
               came
               in
               order
               before
               Samuel
               ,
               but
               none
               of
               them
               was
               chosen
               :
               at
               the
               last
               Dauid
               was
               sent
               for
               ,
               and
               he
               was
               the
               man
               ,
               1.
               
               Sam.
               16.
               
               So
               after
               many
               prophets
               ,
               and
               many
               professions
               in
               the
               world
               ,
               at
               the
               length
               commeth
               Christ
               ,
               and
               he
               is
               annointed
               king
               for
               euer
               .
               And
               as
               when
               Elias
               was
               in
               the
               caue
               ,
               a
               mightie
               winde
               was
               sent
               of
               God
               ,
               
               then
               an
               earthquake
               ,
               then
               a
               fire
               ,
               but
               God
               was
               in
               none
               of
               them
               :
               but
               at
               the
               last
               he
               spake
               in
               a
               soft
               and
               still
               voice
               :
               So
               Christ
               came
               not
               ,
               though
               many
               signes
               and
               wonders
               went
               before
               ,
               till
               he
               himselfe
               spake
               with
               a
               soft
               and
               still
               voice
               in
               the
               forme
               and
               shape
               of
               a
               man.
               
            
             
               4.
               
               For
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 
                 yesterday
                 and
                 to
                 day
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 same
                 for
                 euer
                 ,
              
               Heb.
               13.
               8.
               therefore
               as
               Christ
               is
               alwaies
               the
               same
               ,
               so
               the
               faith
               and
               religion
               of
               Christ
               is
               constant
               and
               immutable
               .
               And
               as
               the
               Apostle
               inferreth
               hereupon
               in
               the
               same
               place
               ,
               
                 Be
                 not
                 carried
                 about
                 with
                 diuers
                 and
                 strange
                 doctrines
                 ,
              
               v.
               9.
               so
               should
               we
               be
               resolued
               and
               setled
               in
               religion
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Wherefore
               ,
               euery
               man
               may
               consider
               ,
               how
               much
               bound
               we
               are
               to
               praise
               God
               ,
               which
               hath
               in
               his
               mercie
               raised
               vs
               vp
               a
               Dauid
               after
               Samuel
               ,
               to
               bring
               home
               the
               arke
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               to
               establish
               and
               settle
               religion
               ,
               
               which
               was
               feared
               of
               many
               ,
               and
               wished
               of
               some
               ,
               to
               be
               flitting
               at
               the
               next
               change
               .
               The
               Pope
               and
               his
               adherents
               would
               draw
               the
               English
               people
               ,
               as
               Ieroboam
               called
               the
               Israelites
               to
               Dan
               and
               Bethel
               ,
               to
               the
               Romane
               religion
               :
               but
               I
               trust
               our
               feete
               shall
               stand
               still
               at
               home
               in
               the
               gates
               of
               Ierusalem
               .
               Let
               men
               therefore
               be
               constant
               in
               faith
               ,
               
                 not
                 be
                 carried
                 away
                 with
                 euery
                 wind
                 of
                 doctrine
                 ,
              
               as
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               Eph.
               4.
               14.
               nor
               halt
               betweene
               two
               opinions
               ,
               as
               some
               ,
               like
               
                 Ianus
                 bifrons
                 ,
              
               looking
               both
               waies
               ,
               haue
               of
               late
               in
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               ,
               set
               a
               foot
               some
               popish
               doctrines
               ,
               mingling
               the
               sweete
               lumpe
               of
               the
               gospel
               ,
               with
               sowre
               leauen
               of
               their
               owne
               .
               Such
               
               teachers
               I
               trust
               will
               hereafter
               be
               better
               aduised
               ,
               and
               fill
               their
               hands
               with
               better
               seede
               ,
               that
               no
               more
               cockle
               and
               darnell
               be
               scattered
               in
               good
               ground
               .
               God
               graunt
               a
               generall
               consent
               in
               iudgement
               and
               concord
               in
               heart
               ,
               both
               in
               teachers
               and
               hearers
               ,
               that
               we
               may
               goe
               vp
               together
               to
               Gods
               house
               ,
               and
               that
               our
               feete
               may
               stand
               stedfastly
               in
               Ierusalem
               :
               that
               as
               Ambrose
               well
               alludeth
               ,
               
                 Sicut
                 rotam
                 intra
                 rotam
                 vidit
                 propheta
                 currentem
                 ;
              
               
               
                 ita
                 teres
                 vita
                 sanctorum
                 est
                 ,
                 &
                 ita
                 sibi
                 concinens
                 ,
                 vt
                 superioribus
                 posteriora
                 respondeant
                 :
              
               as
               the
               Prophet
               saw
               one
               wheele
               runne
               within
               another
               ,
               so
               the
               life
               of
               the
               Saints
               should
               be
               round
               and
               currant
               ,
               and
               so
               consorted
               together
               ,
               as
               one
               part
               may
               answer
               to
               another
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               8.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 In
                 thy
                 gates
                 O
                 Ierusalem
                 .
                 ]
              
               This
               citie
               God
               made
               especiall
               choise
               of
               :
               as
               it
               is
               in
               the
               pslame
               ,
               
                 God
                 loueth
                 the
                 gates
                 of
                 Sion
                 aboue
                 all
                 the
                 habitations
                 of
                 Iacob
                 ,
              
               psal
               .
               87.
               2.
               
               It
               was
               called
               the
               citie
               of
               God
               ,
               v.
               3.
               the
               citie
               of
               the
               great
               king
               .
               math
               .
               5.
               35.
               the
               holy
               citie
               ,
               mat
               .
               4.
               5.
               there
               Abraham
               was
               bid
               to
               sacrifice
               his
               sonne
               ,
               Gen.
               22.
               of
               this
               citie
               was
               Melchisedeck
               founder
               ,
               and
               king
               .
               Gen.
               14.
               yet
               notwithstanding
               all
               these
               priuiledges
               ,
               this
               citie
               was
               often
               for
               their
               sinnes
               besieged
               ,
               by
               
               Pharao
               Necho
               ,
               2.
               king
               .
               22.
               23.
               by
               Nabuchadnezzer
               ,
               2.
               king
               .
               24.
               11.
               destroied
               by
               the
               king
               of
               Babylon
               ,
               2.
               king
               .
               25.
               and
               at
               the
               last
               vtterly
               ruinated
               and
               made
               desolate
               by
               the
               Romanes
               .
               Whereby
               we
               learne
               ,
               that
               there
               is
               no
               citie
               or
               countrie
               ,
               though
               indued
               with
               neuer
               so
               great
               priuiledges
               ,
               but
               if
               they
               continue
               in
               sinne
               ,
               may
               be
               in
               Gods
               iustice
               cast
               off
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               Prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 He
                 turneth
                 a
                 fruitfull
                 land
                 into
                 barrennes
                 for
                 the
                 wickednes
                 of
                 the
                 people
                 ,
              
               
               
                 that
                 dwel
                 therein
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               107.
               34.
               
               God
               is
               able
               both
               to
               change
               cities
               and
               countries
               ,
               to
               bring
               them
               to
               perpetuall
               ruine
               and
               desolation
               ,
               because
               of
               the
               sinnes
               of
               the
               inhabitants
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               the
               Lord
               dealt
               with
               Samaria
               ,
               2.
               king
               .
               21.
               13.
               and
               with
               Shiloh
               ,
               where
               three
               hundred
               yeares
               the
               arke
               of
               God
               rested
               :
               
                 Goe
                 vnto
                 my
                 place
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 at
                 Shiloh
                 where
                 I
                 set
                 my
                 name
                 at
                 the
                 beginning
                 ,
                 and
                 behold
                 what
                 I
                 did
                 vnto
                 it
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 wickednes
                 of
                 my
                 people
                 Israel
                 ,
              
               Ier.
               7.
               12.
               
               What
               is
               become
               now
               of
               Babylon
               the
               chiefe
               citie
               of
               the
               Chaldeans
               ,
               of
               Niniue
               of
               the
               Assyrians
               ,
               of
               Reuatane
               the
               great
               citie
               of
               the
               Medes
               ,
               Susis
               of
               the
               Persians
               ?
               there
               is
               no
               monument
               of
               them
               left
               ,
               
               but
               as
               Seneca
               saith
               ,
               
                 Ipsa
                 fundamenta
                 consumpta
                 sunt
                 ,
                 nec
                 quicquam
                 extat
                 ,
                 
                 quo
                 appareat
                 illas
                 saltem
                 fuisse
                 :
                 the
                 very
                 foundations
                 are
                 worne
                 out
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 doth
                 not
                 appeare
                 that
                 there
                 were
                 any
                 such
                 cities
                 .
              
            
             
               3.
               
               As
               God
               hath
               dealt
               with
               these
               citties
               ,
               so
               he
               can
               offer
               the
               same
               occasion
               to
               others
               :
               
                 I
                 will
                 stretch
                 ouer
                 Ierusalem
                 the
                 line
                 of
                 Samaria
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 plummet
                 of
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 Achab
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 will
                 wipe
                 Ierusalem
                 ,
                 as
                 a
                 man
                 wipeth
                 a
                 dish
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 wipeth
                 ,
                 and
                 turneth
                 it
                 vpside
                 downe
                 ,
              
               2.
               
               King.
               21.
               13.
               
               It
               is
               no
               whitte
               harder
               for
               God
               to
               bring
               destruction
               vpon
               citties
               ,
               then
               for
               the
               mason
               to
               lift
               vp
               his
               line
               and
               plummet
               ouer
               his
               worke
               ,
               or
               then
               it
               is
               to
               wipe
               a
               dish
               when
               it
               is
               foule
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               cause
               why
               the
               Lord
               iudgeth
               countries
               and
               citties
               is
               expressed
               in
               the
               case
               of
               Israel
               ;
               
                 because
                 they
                 sinned
                 against
                 the
                 Lord
                 their
                 God
                 ,
                 &c.
                 and
                 walked
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 fashion
                 of
                 the
                 heathen
                 ,
                 &c.
                 and
                 had
                 made
                 them
                 images
                 ,
                 &c.
                 therefore
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 was
                 exceeding
                 wroth
                 with
                 Israel
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 them
                 out
                 of
                 his
                 sight
                 ,
              
               2.
               
               King.
               7.
               8
               ,
               10
               ,
               18.
               
               The
               like
               sinnes
               in
               any
               cittie
               neuer
               so
               famous
               or
               honourable
               in
               the
               world
               ,
               must
               needs
               procure
               the
               same
               iudgements
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               in
               that
               Ierusalem
               that
               famous
               citie
               is
               now
               forsaken
               of
               her
               inhabitants
               ,
               &
               made
               an
               habitation
               of
               deuils
               ,
               of
               pagans
               &
               infidels
               ,
               we
               learne
               ,
               that
               Gods
               church
               and
               
               the
               true
               religion
               is
               not
               limited
               to
               any
               certaine
               place
               :
               and
               seeing
               God
               hath
               shewed
               such
               indignation
               toward
               that
               countrie
               &
               nation
               ,
               which
               put
               Christ
               to
               death
               ,
               what
               reason
               had
               the
               Romane
               bishops
               in
               time
               past
               ,
               to
               incite
               Christian
               Princes
               to
               mooue
               such
               deadly
               warres
               for
               the
               recouerie
               of
               the
               holy
               land
               ,
               as
               they
               called
               it
               ?
               After
               God
               had
               polluted
               his
               owne
               cittie
               and
               temple
               ,
               and
               Christ
               neglected
               the
               very
               place
               of
               his
               birth
               for
               the
               sinnes
               of
               the
               people
               ,
               
               what
               cause
               had
               Christians
               so
               superstitiously
               to
               be
               addicted
               to
               that
               place
               ,
               which
               was
               reiected
               of
               God
               ?
               Their
               ouersight
               herein
               well
               appeared
               by
               the
               euent
               ,
               for
               we
               shall
               not
               read
               of
               any
               warres
               that
               continued
               longer
               ,
               with
               greater
               bloodshed
               ,
               and
               lesse
               happie
               successe
               ,
               then
               these
               maintained
               by
               Christians
               against
               the
               Saracens
               for
               the
               possession
               of
               the
               holy
               land
               .
               Hereupon
               Princes
               lead
               with
               a
               superstitious
               conceite
               ,
               take
               vpon
               them
               the
               crosse
               ,
               to
               goe
               fight
               for
               Hierusalem
               ,
               as
               Henrie
               the
               2.
               
               Richard
               the
               1.
               king
               Iohn
               ,
               with
               diuerse
               other
               ,
               who
               thought
               simply
               as
               Naaman
               ,
               that
               no
               earth
               was
               so
               holy
               as
               that
               about
               Iordan
               ,
               2.
               
               King.
               5.
               17.
               
               But
               our
               Sauiour
               hath
               giuen
               vs
               a
               rule
               for
               this
               :
               
                 The
                 houre
                 commeth
                 ,
                 when
                 ye
                 shall
                 neither
                 in
                 this
                 mountaine
                 ,
                 nor
                 at
                 Ierusalem
                 
                 worship
                 the
                 father
                 ,
              
               Iohn
               .
               4.
               23.
               
               The
               true
               worship
               of
               God
               is
               not
               tied
               to
               Ierusalem
               ,
               as
               Hierome
               wel
               expoundeth
               those
               words
               of
               the
               Psalme
               ;
               
                 God
                 loueth
                 the
                 gates
                 of
                 Sion
                 more
                 then
                 all
                 the
                 habitations
                 of
                 Iacob
                 .
                 Nunquid
                 istas
                 portas
                 diligit
                 Deus
                 ,
              
               
               
                 quas
                 videmus
                 in
                 cineres
                 &
                 favillas
                 conuersas
                 ?
                 &c.
                 Doe
                 you
                 thinke
                 that
                 God
                 loued
                 these
                 gates
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 turned
                 to
                 dust
                 and
                 ashes
                 ?
                 no
                 man
                 is
                 so
                 foolish
                 to
                 thinke
                 so
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               And
               againe
               he
               saith
               ,
               
                 Ne
                 quicquam
                 fidei
                 tuae
                 deesse
                 putes
                 ,
              
               
               
                 quia
                 Hierosolymam
                 non
                 vidisti
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Thinke
                 not
                 any
                 thing
                 therefore
                 wanting
                 to
                 your
                 faith
                 ,
                 because
                 you
                 haue
                 not
                 seene
                 Ierusalem
                 ,
                 nor
                 vs
                 therefore
                 better
                 ,
                 because
                 we
                 haue
                 there
                 our
                 habitation
                 .
              
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               the
               like
               fantasie
               the
               Papists
               haue
               of
               Rome
               ,
               which
               the
               Iewes
               had
               of
               Ierusalem
               ;
               they
               imagine
               that
               Gods
               Church
               cannot
               possibly
               faile
               there
               :
               as
               though
               they
               euer
               had
               the
               like
               promise
               for
               Rome
               ,
               as
               the
               Iewes
               had
               for
               Sion
               ▪
               
                 That
                 God
                 would
                 dwell
                 there
                 for
                 euer
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               132.
               14.
               
               Howe
               would
               the
               Papists
               triumph
               if
               they
               could
               finde
               any
               such
               text
               for
               Rome
               ,
               
                 This
                 is
                 my
                 rest
                 for
                 euer
                 ?
              
               yet
               if
               they
               did
               ,
               such
               promises
               are
               but
               conditionall
               ;
               for
               God
               no
               longer
               bindeth
               himselfe
               not
               to
               forsake
               a
               nation
               ,
               
               then
               while
               they
               doe
               not
               forsake
               him
               .
               Let
               proud
               Rome
               therefore
               know
               ,
               that
               seeing
               
               shee
               is
               fallen
               away
               from
               the
               faith
               of
               Christ
               by
               most
               grosse
               idolatrie
               ,
               and
               other
               apostasies
               ,
               that
               shee
               cannot
               long
               escape
               vnpunished
               :
               Ierusalem
               was
               deerer
               in
               gods
               sight
               then
               euer
               Rome
               was
               ,
               it
               was
               longer
               protected
               by
               him
               ,
               greater
               miracles
               had
               God
               wrought
               for
               them
               ,
               more
               holy
               men
               and
               Prophets
               there
               preached
               ,
               then
               euer
               Rome
               had
               .
               And
               Hierome
               speaking
               of
               poore
               Bethlem
               saith
               ,
               
                 Puto
                 sanctior
                 locus
                 est
                 rupe
                 Tarpeia
                 ,
              
               
               
                 quae
                 de
                 caelo
                 saepius
                 fulminata
                 ostendit
                 ,
                 quod
                 deo
                 displiceat
                 :
                 I
                 take
                 it
                 to
                 be
                 a
                 more
                 holy
                 place
                 ,
                 then
                 the
                 Tarpeian
                 rocke
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 which
                 beeing
                 so
                 often
                 smitten
                 with
                 lightening
                 ,
                 sheweth
                 that
                 God
                 was
                 angrie
                 with
                 it
                 .
              
               If
               Bethlem
               was
               not
               spared
               ,
               where
               Christ
               was
               borne
               ,
               much
               lesse
               Rome
               is
               priuiledged
               ,
               by
               whose
               authoritie
               Christ
               died
               :
               
                 If
                 God
                 spared
                 not
                 the
                 naturall
                 branches
                 ,
                 take
                 heed
                 least
                 he
                 spare
                 not
                 thee
                 ,
              
               saith
               S.
               Paul
               to
               the
               Romans
               .
               Rom.
               11.
               21.
               
               The
               Iewes
               then
               were
               the
               true
               naturall
               branches
               ,
               the
               Romans
               strange
               and
               adopted
               branches
               :
               therfore
               if
               the
               first
               were
               plucked
               off
               for
               their
               rebellion
               ,
               the
               second
               must
               not
               thinke
               to
               stand
               in
               their
               superstition
               .
               A
               foolish
               conceit
               therefore
               and
               imagination
               it
               is
               ,
               that
               Rome
               should
               be
               the
               mother
               Church
               ,
               and
               nurserie
               of
               all
               the
               world
               .
               Hierome
               well
               
               saith
               :
               
                 Non
                 audeo
                 Dei
                 omnipotentiam
                 angusto
                 fine
                 concludere
                 ,
              
               
               
                 &
                 coarctare
                 paruo
                 terrae
                 loco
                 ,
                 quem
                 non
                 capit
                 c●lum
                 .
                 I
                 dare
                 not
                 conclude
                 Gods
                 omnipotencie
                 with
                 a
                 smal
                 bounds
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 thrust
                 him
                 into
                 a
                 small
                 roome
                 ,
                 whome
                 the
                 heauens
                 cannot
                 hold
                 .
              
            
             
               Thirdly
               ,
               this
               example
               of
               Ierusalē
               doth
               admonish
               all
               cities
               ,
               not
               to
               presume
               of
               their
               temporall
               and
               externall
               happines
               ,
               but
               to
               learne
               thankefully
               to
               embrace
               the
               truth
               ,
               least
               for
               their
               vnthankfulnes
               they
               be
               depriued
               both
               of
               the
               vertue
               ,
               and
               the
               handmaid
               thereof
               prosperitie
               .
               Let
               Ierusalem
               of
               England
               the
               citie
               of
               London
               be
               warned
               by
               her
               sister
               ,
               the
               Iewish
               Ierusalem
               ,
               that
               shee
               take
               heede
               of
               her
               sinnes
               ,
               that
               shee
               tast
               not
               of
               her
               sause
               .
               Let
               the
               calamitie
               of
               other
               neighbour
               cities
               admonish
               her
               :
               it
               is
               some
               while
               since
               Lyons
               in
               Fraunce
               was
               in
               one
               night
               consumed
               sticke
               and
               stone
               with
               fire
               :
               whereof
               Seneca
               maketh
               this
               lamentable
               mention
               ,
               
               
                 Vna
                 tantùm
                 nox
                 interfuit
                 inter
                 civitatem
                 maximam
                 &
                 nullam
                 ,
                 denique
                 diutius
                 tibi
                 ,
                 illam
                 perijsse
                 ,
                 quàm
                 perijt
                 ,
                 narro
                 .
                 There
                 was
                 but
                 the
                 distance
                 of
                 one
                 night
                 betweene
                 a
                 great
                 citie
                 ,
                 and
                 none
                 at
                 all
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 haue
                 beene
                 longer
                 in
                 telling
                 you
                 of
                 the
                 destruction
                 thereof
                 ,
                 then
                 it
                 was
                 in
                 destroying
                 .
              
               Verolamium
               here
               in
               England
               situate
               not
               farre
               
               from
               S.
               Albons
               ,
               
               was
               a
               famous
               and
               great
               citie
               ,
               now
               not
               so
               much
               as
               the
               name
               thereof
               remaineth
               .
               What
               great
               calamities
               befell
               most
               famous
               cities
               in
               Hieroms
               time
               he
               himselfe
               reporteth
               :
               how
               all
               France
               was
               wasted
               of
               the
               Barbarians
               ,
               
               
                 the
                 city
                 of
                 Ments
                 taken
                 ,
              
               and
               many
               thousands
               slaine
               in
               the
               Church
               :
               
                 Ipsa
                 Hispania
                 iam
                 peritura
                 contremiscit
                 :
              
               Spaine
               trembleth
               ,
               as
               if
               it
               were
               now
               readie
               to
               perish
               .
               And
               what
               hath
               hapned
               in
               other
               countries
               and
               cities
               round
               about
               vs
               in
               our
               time
               ,
               who
               can
               be
               ignorant
               ?
               The
               massacre
               of
               Paris
               ,
               the
               desolation
               of
               Antwerpe
               ,
               the
               sacking
               of
               Calice
               ,
               surprising
               of
               many
               townes
               in
               the
               low
               countries
               .
               All
               these
               examples
               should
               warne
               noble
               cities
               and
               corporations
               of
               England
               to
               beware
               of
               those
               sinnes
               ,
               for
               the
               which
               the
               other
               haue
               been
               chastised
               .
               As
               Hierome
               wel
               saith
               ,
               
                 Orbis
                 terrarum
                 ruit
                 ,
                 in
                 nobis
                 peccata
                 non
                 ruant
                 ,
              
               
               
                 vrbs
                 inclyta
                 &
                 Romani
                 imperij
                 caput
                 ,
                 vno
                 hausta
                 est
                 incendio
                 :
                 The
                 famous
                 citie
                 and
                 chiefe
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 citie
                 at
                 once
                 consumed
                 with
                 fire
                 ,
                 the
                 world
                 falleth
                 to
                 ruine
                 ,
                 and
                 yet
                 within
                 there
                 is
                 no
                 ruine
                 of
                 our
                 sinnes
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               The
               9.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 Ierusalem
                 is
                 built
                 as
                 a
                 citie
                 .
                 ]
              
               Here
               is
               expressed
               
               one
               principal
               fruit
               of
               Dauids
               prosperous
               ,
               good
               ,
               &
               peaceable
               gouernment
               ,
               that
               the
               city
               was
               beutified
               &
               enlarged
               with
               many
               goodly
               houses
               and
               buildings
               :
               which
               sheweth
               that
               it
               is
               not
               the
               least
               temporall
               blessing
               ,
               when
               a
               citie
               or
               nation
               enioyeth
               peace
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               build
               them
               houses
               and
               plant
               their
               grounds
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Thus
               the
               Lord
               saith
               by
               his
               Prophet
               ,
               
                 I
                 will
                 bring
                 againe
                 the
                 captiuitie
                 of
                 lacobs
                 tents
                 ,
                 and
                 haue
                 compassion
                 on
                 his
                 dwelling
                 places
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 citie
                 shall
                 be
                 builded
                 vpon
                 her
                 owne
                 heape
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 palace
                 shall
                 remaine
                 after
                 the
                 manner
                 thereof
                 .
              
               Ierem.
               30.
               18.
               
               The
               Lord
               promiseth
               this
               as
               a
               singular
               blessing
               ,
               that
               Ierusalem
               which
               was
               before
               destroied
               and
               laide
               wast
               ,
               should
               be
               reedified
               againe
               ,
               and
               recouer
               the
               pristine
               beautie
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               the
               Psalmist
               doth
               celebrate
               this
               as
               a
               great
               fauour
               of
               God
               to
               Ierusalem
               ,
               that
               when
               the
               citie
               was
               besieged
               ,
               as
               it
               should
               seeme
               of
               Senacherib
               in
               the
               daies
               of
               Hezekiah
               ,
               the
               Lord
               so
               protected
               it
               ,
               that
               no
               part
               thereof
               was
               defaced
               :
               
                 Compasse
                 about
                 Sion
                 ,
                 goe
                 round
                 about
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 tell
                 the
                 towers
                 thereof
                 ,
                 marke
                 well
                 the
                 wall
                 thereof
                 ,
                 behold
                 the
                 towers
                 ,
                 that
                 you
                 may
                 tell
                 your
                 posteritie
                 .
              
               Psal.
               48.
               13.
               14.
               
               There
               was
               not
               so
               much
               as
               one
               tower
               ,
               or
               any
               part
               of
               the
               wall
               
               defaced
               .
               So
               Dauid
               when
               he
               had
               taken
               the
               sort
               of
               Sion
               ,
               he
               built
               round
               about
               it
               ,
               &
               called
               it
               the
               cittie
               of
               Dauid
               (
               to
               which
               building
               this
               verse
               hath
               speciall
               relation
               )
               and
               the
               reason
               thereof
               is
               giuen
               ,
               
                 Dauid
                 prospered
                 and
                 grew
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 Lord
                 of
                 hosts
                 was
                 with
                 him
                 .
              
               2.
               
               Sam.
               5.
               9
               ,
               10.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Like
               as
               the
               nest
               is
               to
               the
               birds
               ,
               so
               is
               a
               mans
               house
               as
               Iob
               resembleth
               it
               :
               
                 I
                 shall
                 die
                 in
                 my
                 nest
                 ,
              
               29.
               18.
               
               Euen
               as
               when
               the
               sillie
               birds
               are
               suffered
               to
               build
               their
               nestes
               quietly
               ,
               where
               to
               lay
               their
               young
               ;
               so
               is
               it
               with
               citizens
               ,
               when
               they
               safely
               and
               securely
               dwel
               in
               their
               houses
               .
               They
               are
               as
               mens
               bowers
               ,
               wherein
               they
               solace
               and
               refresh
               themselues
               from
               the
               heate
               and
               cold
               ,
               as
               Ionas
               reioyced
               in
               the
               gourd
               that
               shadowed
               him
               from
               the
               sunne
               ,
               Ion.
               4.
               so
               a
               ioy
               it
               is
               when
               men
               may
               sit
               quietly
               vnder
               their
               owne
               bowers
               .
               Vnto
               this
               outward
               flourishing
               in
               comely
               and
               decent
               buildings
               ,
               the
               Lord
               compareth
               the
               spirituall
               encreasing
               of
               his
               Church
               :
               
                 If
                 shee
                 be
                 a
                 wall
                 ,
                 we
                 will
                 build
                 vpon
                 her
                 a
                 siluer
                 pallace
                 ,
                 if
                 shee
                 be
                 a
                 doore
                 ,
                 we
                 will
                 keepe
                 her
                 in
                 with
                 doores
                 of
                 cedar
                 .
              
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               preacher
               sheweth
               what
               is
               the
               cause
               of
               this
               blessing
               ,
               
               that
               a
               man
               sitteth
               quietly
               in
               his
               owne
               house
               ,
               and
               inlargeth
               
               his
               dwelling
               place
               ,
               and
               prospereth
               in
               his
               affaires
               :
               
                 It
                 is
                 of
                 the
                 hand
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 Gods
                 gift
                 ,
                 for
                 a
                 man
                 to
                 take
                 pleasure
                 in
                 his
                 labors
                 .
              
               Eccles.
               2.
               24.
               c.
               5.
               17.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               Wherefore
               much
               is
               this
               nation
               of
               England
               ,
               
               and
               especially
               the
               goodly
               citties
               and
               townes
               thereof
               to
               reioyce
               and
               giue
               thankes
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               cittie
               of
               London
               most
               of
               all
               ,
               for
               this
               long
               time
               of
               peace
               ,
               whereby
               men
               doe
               inioy
               the
               labours
               of
               their
               owne
               hands
               .
               We
               haue
               not
               built
               houses
               for
               others
               to
               dwel
               in
               ,
               nor
               planted
               vineyards
               ,
               and
               others
               eate
               the
               fruit
               thereof
               ,
               as
               the
               Lord
               threatned
               the
               Israelites
               ,
               2.
               
               Deut.
               28.
               30.
               
               And
               as
               other
               citties
               haue
               had
               wofull
               experience
               :
               their
               houses
               haue
               beene
               beaten
               downe
               ouer
               their
               heads
               ,
               and
               the
               goodly
               sumptuous
               buildings
               made
               lowe
               with
               the
               ground
               .
               Sometime
               cities
               and
               famous
               buildings
               haue
               beene
               ouerthrown
               with
               water
               ,
               as
               in
               Noahs
               deluge
               :
               sometime
               consumed
               with
               fire
               ,
               as
               Sodome
               and
               Gomorrha
               :
               sometime
               deuoured
               and
               swallowed
               vp
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               as
               the
               tents
               &
               houses
               of
               Cote
               ,
               Dathan
               ,
               and
               Abiram
               :
               beaten
               downe
               with
               windes
               ,
               as
               Iobs
               house
               .
               We
               read
               in
               forraine
               stories
               of
               great
               calamities
               which
               haue
               fallen
               vpon
               citties
               :
               
               at
               Antioch
               there
               was
               an
               earthquake
               which
               continued
               
               a
               whole
               yeare
               together
               .
               At
               Nicomedia
               many
               houses
               were
               shaken
               downe
               with
               an
               earthquake
               ,
               
               and
               diuers
               people
               slaine
               with
               the
               fall
               of
               the
               houses
               ,
               and
               among
               the
               rest
               ,
               Cecropius
               and
               Arsacius
               :
               at
               Constantinople
               vnder
               Leo
               the
               Emperour
               ,
               such
               a
               raging
               fire
               tooke
               the
               cittie
               ,
               
               that
               it
               continued
               foure
               daies
               ,
               and
               the
               houses
               were
               burnt
               the
               length
               of
               14.
               furlongs
               .
               The
               like
               calamities
               Seneca
               reporteth
               to
               haue
               beene
               in
               his
               time
               :
               
               
                 Quoties
                 Asia
                 ,
                 quoties
                 Achaia
                 vobes
                 vno
                 tremore
                 ceciderunt
                 ?
                 quot
                 oppida
                 in
                 Syria
                 ,
                 quot
                 in
                 Macedonia
                 diruta
                 sunt
                 ?
                 Howe
                 often
                 haue
                 the
                 cities
                 of
                 Asia
                 and
                 Achaia
                 fallen
                 downe
                 by
                 earthquakes
                 ▪
                 how
                 many
                 cities
                 in
                 Syria
                 and
                 Macedonia
                 haue
                 beene
                 swallowed
                 vp
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 ,
                 in
                 Cyprus
                 likewise
                 and
                 Paphus
                 ?
              
               The
               cittie
               of
               London
               hath
               not
               beene
               free
               in
               time
               past
               from
               such
               losses
               :
               ann
               .
               1091.
               
               in
               the
               4.
               yeare
               of
               William
               Rufus
               ,
               600
               houses
               were
               blowen
               downe
               by
               tempest
               in
               London
               :
               ann
               .
               1232.
               in
               the
               16.
               of
               Henrie
               the
               third
               ,
               great
               hurt
               was
               done
               in
               the
               cittie
               by
               thunder
               and
               lightning
               Wherfore
               ,
               much
               are
               we
               all
               bound
               to
               thanke
               god
               that
               hath
               preserued
               vs
               ,
               our
               cities
               ,
               our
               houses
               ,
               from
               these
               fearefull
               calamities
               :
               that
               we
               are
               not
               surprised
               in
               our
               houses
               ,
               and
               sitting
               at
               our
               tables
               of
               our
               enemies
               ,
               as
               Balthasar
               
               was
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               his
               feast
               .
               Dan.
               5.
               and
               as
               many
               haue
               beene
               in
               other
               places
               :
               and
               how
               much
               are
               we
               to
               praise
               God
               ,
               that
               hath
               so
               wrought
               for
               this
               Church
               and
               common
               wealth
               ,
               prouiding
               a
               nourcing
               father
               for
               vs
               ,
               vnder
               whose
               shadow
               we
               trust
               to
               be
               defended
               still
               in
               peace
               and
               true
               religion
               ,
               that
               I
               hope
               we
               may
               say
               as
               Dauid
               here
               doeth
               ,
               of
               our
               cities
               and
               townes
               :
               
                 Ierusalem
                 is
                 a
                 city
                 well
                 built
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               Further
               ,
               because
               mention
               is
               here
               made
               of
               building
               ,
               it
               shall
               not
               be
               amisse
               briefly
               to
               obserue
               ,
               what
               rules
               are
               to
               be
               kept
               in
               the
               rearing
               of
               edifices
               among
               Christians
               ,
               
               which
               may
               briefly
               be
               reduced
               to
               these
               three
               ,
               that
               they
               be
               made
               without
               oppression
               or
               
                 crueltie
                 ,
              
               not
               with
               ostentation
               and
               
                 vanitie
                 ,
              
               nor
               yet
               without
               compassion
               &
               
                 charitie
                 .
              
            
             
               For
               the
               first
               ,
               the
               Prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 Woe
                 vnto
                 him
                 that
                 buildeth
                 his
                 chambers
                 with
                 vnrighteousnesse
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 chambers
                 without
                 equitie
                 ,
              
               Ierem.
               22.
               13.
               
               So
               doe
               they
               ,
               which
               oppresse
               the
               poore
               ,
               and
               ouer-reach
               vpon
               their
               grounds
               to
               enlarge
               their
               own
               dwellings
               ,
               as
               Ahab
               did
               vpon
               Naboth
               ,
               1.
               
               King.
               21.
               
               For
               the
               next
               ,
               the
               prophet
               reprooueth
               those
               ,
               
                 that
                 build
                 them
                 houses
                 ,
                 &c.
                 and
                 call
                 their
                 lands
                 by
                 their
                 names
                 :
              
               Such
               was
               Nabuchadnezzar
               ,
               
               that
               said
               in
               the
               pride
               of
               his
               heart
               ,
               
                 is
                 not
                 this
                 Babel
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 haue
                 built
                 for
                 the
                 maiestie
                 of
                 mine
                 honour
                 ?
              
               Dan.
               4.
               17.
               
               A
               vaine
               thing
               is
               it
               for
               men
               to
               set
               their
               heart
               vpon
               their
               gay
               houses
               ,
               and
               to
               swell
               in
               pride
               because
               of
               their
               sumptuous
               edifices
               ,
               seeing
               they
               must
               one
               day
               leaue
               their
               lightsome
               and
               glorious
               houses
               ,
               and
               lie
               in
               darknes
               .
               Thirdly
               ,
               men
               must
               not
               set
               their
               minds
               so
               to
               build
               their
               houses
               of
               timber
               &
               stone
               ,
               as
               that
               they
               forget
               to
               releeue
               the
               liuing
               stones
               ,
               the
               poore
               members
               of
               Christ
               ,
               whereof
               the
               spirituall
               building
               of
               the
               Church
               consisteth
               :
               which
               Iob
               noteth
               as
               a
               fault
               in
               the
               rich
               men
               of
               his
               time
               ,
               that
               did
               build
               in
               solitarie
               places
               ,
               Iob.
               3.
               14.
               that
               they
               might
               dwell
               alone
               ,
               and
               not
               be
               troubled
               with
               the
               crie
               of
               the
               poore
               at
               their
               gate
               .
               Such
               are
               those
               builders
               in
               these
               daies
               ,
               that
               delight
               to
               build
               faire
               to
               the
               eye
               ,
               but
               the
               poore
               there
               findeth
               nothing
               to
               fill
               his
               hūgrie
               bellie
               :
               they
               make
               many
               chimneies
               ,
               but
               keepe
               fewe
               fires
               :
               their
               chambers
               are
               lightsome
               with
               faire
               windowes
               ,
               and
               their
               staires
               loftie
               with
               high
               towres
               ,
               but
               their
               gates
               not
               adorned
               with
               troupes
               of
               the
               poore
               .
               Their
               palaces
               are
               seene
               a
               farre
               off
               ,
               but
               not
               smelt
               neere
               hand
               :
               their
               lodgings
               are
               hung
               with
               greene
               ,
               and
               grasse
               groweth
               
               at
               the
               doores
               .
               Ambrose
               saith
               well
               of
               such
               ,
               
                 Clamat
                 ante
                 domum
                 tuam
                 nudus
                 &
                 negligis
                 ,
                 &
                 tu
                 sollicitus
                 es
                 quibus
                 marmoribus
                 pavimenta
                 vestias
                 :
                 The
                 poore
                 naked
                 crieth
                 at
                 thy
                 doore
                 not
                 regarded
                 ,
                 and
                 yet
                 thou
                 art
                 carefull
                 with
                 what
                 marble
                 the
                 floore
                 should
                 be
                 paued
                 .
              
               Wherefore
               if
               any
               will
               build
               sure
               ,
               that
               their
               habitation
               may
               remaine
               ,
               and
               that
               Ierusalem
               may
               still
               be
               as
               a
               citie
               well
               built
               :
               let
               them
               lay
               the
               foundation
               in
               equitie
               .
               Houses
               built
               with
               vsurie
               ,
               extortion
               ,
               wrong
               iudgement
               ,
               briberie
               ,
               deceit
               ,
               as
               I
               am
               afraid
               the
               houses
               of
               many
               in
               the
               countrie
               are
               ,
               but
               more
               in
               the
               citie
               ,
               cannot
               long
               continue
               ,
               nor
               the
               owners
               long
               enioy
               them
               ,
               but
               as
               Ieremie
               saith
               ,
               ●o
               their
               posteritie
               shal
               soone
               say
               ,
               
                 Habitacula
                 nostra
                 proiecerunt
                 nos
                 ,
                 our
                 habitations
                 haue
                 cast
                 vs
                 out
                 .
              
               Ier.
               9.
               19.
               
            
          
           
             
               The
               10.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 That
                 is
                 compact
                 together
                 in
                 it selfe
                 ]
              
               The
               word
               in
               the
               originall
               is
               
                 chabar
                 ,
              
               which
               signifieth
               to
               ioyne
               together
               .
               The
               Septuagint
               translate
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               
                 which
                 doth
                 participate
                 or
                 communicate
                 together
                 .
              
               Before
               the
               citie
               was
               deuided
               ,
               part
               thereof
               beeing
               possessed
               of
               the
               Iebusites
               ,
               which
               were
               of
               a
               contrarie
               religion
               .
               This
               then
               was
               a
               singular
               
               benefit
               ,
               that
               the
               citie
               which
               was
               before
               disioyned
               in
               religion
               ,
               and
               ciuill
               dissention
               ,
               is
               now
               reduced
               to
               vnitie
               and
               conioyned
               in
               one
               .
               A
               happie
               thing
               therefore
               it
               is
               ,
               when
               a
               nation
               ,
               citie
               ,
               or
               people
               doe
               consent
               and
               agree
               together
               and
               liue
               as
               brethren
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Behold
               
                 (
                 saith
                 the
                 Prophet
                 Dauid
                 )
              
               how
               comely
               and
               good
               a
               thing
               it
               is
               ,
               brethren
               ,
               to
               dwell
               togither
               ,
               
                 Psal.
                 134.
                 1.
                 
                 So
                 the
                 Prophet
                 saith
                 ,
              
               The
               hatred
               of
               Ephraim
               shal
               depart
               ,
               &c.
               
               Ephraim
               shall
               not
               enuie
               Iudah
               ,
               nor
               Iudah
               vexe
               Ephraim
               ,
               
                 Isa.
                 11.
                 23.
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 they
                 which
                 before
                 liued
                 at
                 variance
                 ,
                 shall
                 be
                 reconciled
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               Abraham
               appeased
               the
               stri●e
               that
               was
               betweene
               his
               seruants
               and
               Lots
               ,
               Gen.
               13.
               
               Isaak
               made
               an
               atonement
               with
               Abimelech
               ,
               whose
               seruants
               before
               had
               contended
               with
               Isaaks
               seruants
               for
               certain
               wells
               of
               water
               .
               Gen.
               26.
               
               Moses
               would
               haue
               pacified
               the
               two
               Ebrewes
               that
               stroue
               together
               .
               Exod.
               2.
               13.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               discord
               in
               a
               citie
               ,
               or
               among
               neighbours
               is
               like
               a
               raging
               fire
               :
               as
               Iotham
               prophecied
               ,
               that
               
                 a
                 fire
                 should
                 come
                 from
                 Abimelech
                 ,
                 and
                 consume
                 Sechem
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 fire
                 likewise
                 from
                 Sechem
                 to
                 consume
                 Abimelech
                 ,
              
               
               Iud.
               9.
               20.
               
               Which
               fire
               was
               that
               ciuill
               dissention
               ,
               wherby
               they
               were
               one
               destroied
               
               of
               another
               .
               And
               as
               Abimelech
               when
               he
               had
               destroied
               the
               citie
               ,
               did
               sowe
               it
               with
               salt
               ,
               to
               make
               it
               for
               euer
               vnfruitfull
               ,
               
                 ibid.
              
               v.
               45.
               so
               is
               dissension
               among
               neighbours
               and
               citizens
               ,
               like
               to
               the
               sowing
               of
               salt
               .
               And
               contrariwise
               ,
               vnitie
               and
               concord
               is
               a
               comely
               and
               pleasant
               thing
               ,
               like
               to
               the
               sweete
               ointment
               of
               Aaron
               ,
               that
               gaue
               a
               pleasant
               perfume
               round
               about
               :
               and
               like
               as
               they
               could
               not
               roll
               away
               the
               stone
               vpon
               the
               wells
               mouth
               to
               water
               the
               sheepe
               ,
               till
               all
               the
               shepheards
               came
               together
               ,
               and
               ioyned
               their
               strength
               to
               doe
               it
               ,
               Gen.
               29.
               8.
               so
               by
               concord
               and
               vnitie
               ,
               great
               matters
               are
               compassed
               which
               by
               diuision
               are
               hindred
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Concord
               and
               peace
               is
               an
               euident
               signe
               of
               Gods
               presence
               ,
               who
               is
               the
               author
               of
               peace
               ,
               and
               not
               of
               confusion
               ,
               1.
               
               Cor.
               14.
               33.
               
               And
               the
               Prophet
               Dauid
               hauing
               set
               forth
               the
               singular
               benefit
               of
               concord
               among
               brethren
               ,
               comparing
               it
               to
               the
               dewe
               that
               falleth
               vpon
               the
               hills
               :
               he
               thus
               concludeth
               ,
               
                 there
                 the
                 Lord
                 appointed
                 the
                 life
                 and
                 blessing
                 for
                 euer
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               134.
               3.
               shewing
               that
               all
               blessings
               are
               expected
               ,
               where
               brotherly
               loue
               is
               kept
               and
               nourished
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               then
               ,
               herein
               appeareth
               a
               wonderfull
               worke
               of
               God
               at
               this
               present
               among
               
               vs
               in
               this
               realme
               of
               England
               :
               who
               hath
               made
               this
               nation
               as
               a
               cittie
               well
               compact
               in
               it selfe
               ,
               that
               all
               ,
               as
               one
               man
               ,
               haue
               consented
               togither
               to
               bring
               the
               Lords
               annointed
               to
               Ierusalem
               :
               as
               all
               the
               tribes
               of
               Israel
               came
               vnto
               Dauid
               and
               said
               ,
               
                 we
                 are
                 thy
                 bones
                 and
                 thy
                 flesh
                 :
              
               &
               with
               one
               consent
               annointed
               him
               king
               .
               
               2.
               
               Sam.
               8.
               1.
               
               And
               as
               Israel
               and
               Iuda
               did
               contend
               ,
               which
               should
               be
               most
               forward
               in
               restoring
               Dauid
               ,
               2.
               
               Sam.
               19.
               43.
               
               So
               men
               of
               all
               sorts
               haue
               striued
               ,
               who
               might
               shewe
               most
               ioy
               ,
               and
               greatest
               dutie
               to
               our
               Soueraigne
               .
               What
               troubles
               haue
               men
               feared
               at
               the
               next
               change
               ,
               who
               can
               be
               ignorant
               ?
               many
               wishing
               they
               might
               not
               liue
               to
               see
               those
               daies
               ,
               some
               looking
               as
               it
               were
               a
               squint
               two
               waies
               ,
               to
               be
               readie
               for
               all
               accidents
               ;
               some
               as
               it
               hath
               beene
               credibly
               reported
               ,
               disposing
               their
               lands
               to
               feoffes
               ,
               to
               the
               vse
               of
               their
               heires
               ,
               fearing
               the
               troubles
               of
               these
               daies
               .
               But
               God
               hath
               put
               away
               all
               feare
               ,
               and
               turned
               all
               to
               good
               ,
               and
               wrought
               mens
               hearts
               as
               waxe
               ,
               to
               a
               loyall
               agreement
               ,
               that
               neuer
               any
               prince
               entred
               more
               quietly
               in
               this
               land
               ,
               then
               our
               nowe
               Soueraigne
               Lord
               ,
               whose
               happie
               yeares
               and
               godly
               raigne
               ,
               God
               in
               his
               mercie
               long
               continue
               :
               
                 This
                 is
                 the
                 Lords
                 doing
                 ,
              
               as
               the
               Prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 and
                 it
                 
                 is
                 marueilous
                 in
                 our
                 eies
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               128.
               23.
               
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               let
               vs
               acknowledge
               another
               great
               benefit
               ,
               that
               the
               Lord
               hath
               now
               bestowed
               vpon
               this
               famous
               Island
               of
               Brittannie
               :
               neuer
               could
               it
               be
               said
               ,
               as
               at
               this
               time
               ,
               that
               we
               are
               now
               indeed
               this
               whole
               Island
               compact
               togither
               into
               one
               kingdome
               :
               sometime
               England
               onely
               was
               deuided
               into
               an
               heptarchie
               ,
               
               that
               is
               ,
               into
               seauen
               kingdomes
               ,
               for
               the
               space
               of
               300.
               yeares
               togither
               and
               more
               ,
               from
               ann
               .
               456.
               to
               the
               raigne
               of
               king
               Egbright
               .
               ann
               .
               802.
               
               Then
               England
               beeing
               reduced
               to
               one
               Monarchie
               ,
               yet
               the
               countrie
               of
               Wales
               remained
               a
               seuerall
               kingdome
               vntill
               Edward
               the
               1.
               ann
               .
               1279.
               who
               subdued
               Lewline
               king
               of
               Wales
               ,
               
               and
               made
               his
               eldest
               sonne
               Edward
               prince
               of
               that
               countrie
               .
               But
               all
               this
               while
               England
               and
               Scotland
               remained
               two
               distinct
               kingdomes
               ,
               which
               a
               long
               time
               ,
               one
               offended
               another
               with
               most
               cruell
               and
               fierce
               warres
               :
               now
               are
               they
               by
               Gods
               prouidence
               conioyned
               and
               made
               one
               kingdome
               .
               This
               according
               of
               these
               two
               kingdomes
               was
               diuers
               times
               attempted
               before
               :
               the
               which
               better
               to
               effect
               ,
               diuers
               kings
               of
               England
               gaue
               their
               daughters
               in
               marriage
               to
               the
               kings
               of
               Scots
               ,
               as
               King
               Iohn
               his
               daughter
               Elianor
               ;
               Edward
               the
               2.
               
               Ioane
               his
               
               daughter
               ;
               
               Henrie
               the
               7.
               
               Margaret
               his
               eldest
               daughter
               ,
               of
               whome
               is
               lawefully
               descended
               our
               dread
               Soueraigne
               king
               Iames
               the
               true
               and
               lawfull
               possessor
               of
               both
               kingdomes
               :
               after
               this
               king
               Henrie
               intended
               a
               marriage
               betweene
               his
               sonne
               prince
               Edward
               ,
               
               and
               Marie
               queene
               of
               Scots
               .
               But
               none
               of
               these
               deuises
               tooke
               place
               ,
               that
               this
               worke
               might
               not
               seeme
               by
               mans
               counsell
               to
               be
               compassed
               ,
               but
               by
               gods
               prouidence
               onely
               to
               be
               effected
               :
               So
               that
               we
               may
               now
               say
               of
               this
               Isle
               ,
               as
               Dauid
               here
               of
               Ierusalē
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               kingdome
               
                 compacted
                 togither
                 in
                 it selfe
                 .
              
            
             
               Thirdly
               ,
               let
               vs
               all
               learne
               nowe
               to
               loue
               as
               brethren
               ,
               that
               neighbours
               should
               liue
               peaceably
               and
               louingly
               togither
               ;
               not
               one
               to
               be
               readie
               to
               offend
               and
               grieue
               another
               :
               but
               as
               we
               see
               in
               great
               citties
               ,
               the
               houses
               to
               be
               one
               ioyned
               to
               another
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               compacted
               togither
               ,
               so
               that
               there
               might
               be
               as
               neere
               a
               coniunction
               in
               mens
               hearts
               and
               affections
               .
               While
               men
               are
               in
               wrath
               and
               at
               variance
               ,
               their
               praiers
               are
               hindred
               ,
               their
               mind
               disquieted
               ,
               Gods
               worship
               neglected
               ,
               some
               are
               wronged
               ,
               others
               prouoked
               .
               Howe
               should
               the
               child
               looke
               vpon
               his
               father
               ,
               whē
               he
               hateth
               his
               brother
               ?
               how
               should
               we
               thinke
               to
               be
               forgiuen
               of
               God
               ,
               
               when
               we
               seeke
               reuenge
               one
               against
               another
               ?
               how
               can
               any
               man
               in
               wrath
               or
               enuie
               say
               the
               Lords
               praier
               ?
               as
               Hierome
               saith
               ,
               
                 animo
                 discrepante
                 cum
                 verbis
                 ,
                 oratione
                 dissidente
                 cum
                 ,
                 factis
                 ,
                 Our
                 minde
                 dissenting
                 from
                 our
                 words
                 ,
                 and
                 our
                 words
                 varying
                 from
                 our
                 deeds
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               The
               11.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 Whereunto
                 the
                 tribes
                 ,
                 euen
                 the
                 tribes
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 goe
                 vp
                 .
                 ]
              
               King
               Dauids
               especiall
               care
               was
               to
               reduce
               the
               people
               of
               God
               to
               one
               vniforme
               worship
               ,
               that
               euery
               man
               should
               not
               be
               permitted
               to
               deuise
               a
               religion
               to
               himselfe
               ,
               but
               that
               all
               should
               goe
               vp
               to
               Hierusalem
               to
               worship
               God
               there
               .
               So
               this
               care
               doeth
               principally
               belong
               vnto
               Princes
               ,
               to
               see
               all
               false
               worshippes
               abolished
               ,
               and
               the
               true
               seruice
               of
               God
               established
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               This
               then
               is
               rendred
               as
               a
               reason
               ,
               how
               it
               came
               to
               passe
               ,
               that
               Micah
               set
               vp
               Seraphim
               in
               his
               house
               ,
               and
               consecrated
               a
               new
               kind
               of
               priesthood
               :
               
                 There
                 was
                 in
                 those
                 daies
                 no
                 king
                 in
                 Israel
                 ,
                 but
                 euery
                 man
                 did
                 that
                 which
                 was
                 good
                 in
                 his
                 owne
                 ei●s
                 ,
              
               Iudg.
               17.
               6.
               
               A
               vertuous
               king
               then
               is
               a
               most
               excellent
               meanes
               ,
               to
               drawe
               the
               people
               distracted
               in
               opinions
               and
               sectes
               ,
               to
               one
               true
               worship
               
               of
               God
               :
               they
               that
               liue
               in
               one
               kingdome
               ,
               should
               haue
               one
               Christendome
               ,
               be
               all
               of
               one
               faith
               and
               religion
               :
               as
               they
               obey
               one
               king
               in
               earth
               ,
               so
               they
               should
               adore
               one
               God
               in
               heauen
               :
               and
               as
               they
               are
               subiect
               to
               one
               lawe
               for
               ciuill
               administration
               ,
               so
               they
               should
               walke
               after
               one
               rule
               ,
               concerning
               their
               Christian
               profession
               :
               as
               Moses
               saith
               .
               
                 One
                 law
                 shall
                 be
                 to
                 him
                 that
                 is
                 borne
                 in
                 the
                 land
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 the
                 stranger
                 that
                 dwelleth
                 among
                 you
                 .
              
               Exod.
               12.
               49.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               As
               Dauid
               expelled
               the
               Iebusites
               ,
               which
               hindred
               the
               peace
               of
               Ierusalem
               ,
               hauing
               there
               inhabited
               aboue
               300.
               yeares
               ,
               since
               the
               first
               conquest
               of
               Canaan
               ,
               Iud.
               1.
               21.
               and
               tooke
               away
               their
               blinde
               and
               lame
               idols
               ,
               2.
               
               Sam.
               5.
               8.
               
               So
               Caleb
               had
               long
               before
               driuen
               the
               Anakims
               cruell
               and
               prophane
               gyants
               out
               of
               Hebron
               ,
               Iosua
               .
               14.
               12
               
               Ezra
               also
               caused
               the
               strange
               women
               to
               be
               put
               away
               ,
               which
               were
               married
               to
               diuers
               of
               Israel
               ,
               and
               corrupted
               both
               their
               faith
               &
               language
               ,
               Ezra
               .
               10.
               18.
               
               Nehem.
               13.
               24.
               
               Nehemiah
               likewise
               banished
               the
               irreligious
               merchants
               of
               Tyrus
               ,
               that
               would
               haue
               vttered
               their
               wares
               vpon
               the
               Lords
               day
               ,
               Nehem.
               13.
               21.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               This
               may
               seeme
               to
               be
               the
               meaning
               of
               that
               lawe
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Israelites
               were
               forbidden
               
               to
               sow
               their
               vineyard
               
                 with
                 diuerse
                 seedes
                 ,
              
               or
               to
               
                 plowe
                 with
                 an
                 oxe
                 and
                 an
                 asse
                 togither
                 ,
              
               Deut.
               22.
               9
               ,
               10.
               
               So
               the
               mixture
               of
               diuers
               religions
               ,
               and
               the
               cohabiting
               of
               diuers
               worshippers
               cannot
               be
               good
               .
               As
               Zerubbabel
               and
               Ioshua
               would
               not
               suffer
               the
               enemies
               of
               the
               people
               of
               God
               to
               build
               the
               temple
               with
               them
               ,
               who
               thereunto
               offered
               their
               sacrifice
               deceitfully
               :
               
                 it
                 is
                 not
                 for
                 you
                 ,
                 but
                 for
                 vs
              
               (
               say
               they
               )
               
                 to
                 build
                 an
                 house
                 to
                 the
                 Lord.
              
               Ezra
               ,
               4.
               3.
               
               So
               it
               is
               not
               fit
               ,
               that
               a
               contrarie
               religion
               should
               be
               admitted
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               Lord
               saith
               by
               his
               prophet
               ,
               
                 my
                 glory
                 will
                 I
                 not
                 giue
                 to
                 another
                 ,
              
               Isay
               ,
               42.
               8.
               
               The
               Lord
               will
               not
               deuide
               stakes
               ,
               he
               will
               be
               God
               alone
               ,
               as
               Eliah
               saith
               ,
               
                 If
                 the
                 Lord
                 be
                 God
                 ,
                 follow
                 him
                 :
                 but
                 if
                 Baal
                 be
                 he
                 ,
                 goe
                 after
                 him
                 ,
              
               1.
               
               King.
               18.
               21.
               
               But
               where
               diuers
               different
               professions
               are
               admitted
               ,
               God
               must
               be
               dishonoured
               ,
               who
               can
               not
               by
               contrary
               sects
               be
               truely
               serued
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               then
               we
               may
               acknowledge
               an
               other
               great
               mercie
               toward
               our
               nation
               ,
               
               that
               whereas
               in
               other
               countries
               ,
               diuers
               professions
               of
               religion
               are
               suffered
               ;
               some
               runne
               to
               Dan
               ,
               some
               to
               Bethel
               ,
               some
               to
               Shiloh
               ,
               some
               one
               way
               ,
               some
               another
               .
               All
               the
               tribes
               of
               Israel
               with
               vs
               are
               called
               vp
               to
               Hierusalem
               ;
               the
               holy
               profession
               of
               the
               gospell
               of
               
               Christ
               hath
               these
               many
               yeares
               flourished
               in
               these
               two
               famous
               kingdomes
               of
               England
               and
               Scotland
               ,
               and
               by
               Gods
               mercie
               is
               like
               to
               flourish
               still
               :
               that
               we
               may
               say
               with
               the
               Prophet
               ,
               
                 God
                 is
                 knowne
                 in
                 Iudah
                 ,
                 his
                 name
                 is
                 great
                 in
                 Israel
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               76.
               1.
               
               No
               other
               God
               is
               worshipped
               in
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               but
               the
               Lord
               ;
               no
               other
               religion
               acknowledged
               but
               the
               gospel
               of
               Iesus
               Christ
               :
               and
               our
               Prince
               and
               his
               people
               doe
               say
               with
               one
               ioint
               voice
               vnto
               God
               ,
               
                 Thou
                 art
                 my
                 Lord
                 ,
                 &c
                 ,
                 the
                 sorrowes
                 of
                 them
                 that
                 offer
                 to
                 another
                 God
                 shall
                 be
                 multiplied
                 ,
                 their
                 offerings
                 of
                 blood
                 will
                 I
                 not
                 offer
                 ,
                 neither
                 make
                 mention
                 of
                 their
                 names
                 within
                 my
                 lippes
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               16.
               54.
               
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               if
               all
               the
               tribes
               of
               the
               Lord
               goe
               vp
               to
               Hierusalem
               to
               the
               Tabernacle
               ,
               then
               certes
               ,
               they
               which
               refuse
               to
               goe
               vp
               ,
               are
               not
               the
               tribes
               of
               the
               Lord
               :
               
               here
               then
               is
               an
               admonition
               to
               all
               Recusants
               popish
               &
               others
               ,
               that
               they
               would
               now
               at
               the
               length
               lay
               aside
               their
               froward
               spirits
               ,
               and
               humble
               themselues
               to
               come
               vp
               to
               Ierusalem
               with
               the
               rest
               of
               Gods
               people
               .
               They
               are
               not
               of
               the
               tribes
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
               that
               wil
               not
               goe
               vp
               to
               the
               place
               of
               his
               worship
               .
               Let
               not
               the
               Romist
               deceiue
               himselfe
               ,
               and
               expect
               a
               toleration
               of
               his
               superstitious
               (
               I
               would
               it
               
               were
               not
               also
               an
               idolatrous
               )
               profession
               .
               Certainely
               ,
               where
               Gods
               arke
               is
               ,
               Dagon
               cannot
               stande
               :
               
               but
               shall
               also
               loose
               in
               the
               ende
               both
               his
               head
               and
               hands
               :
               their
               Dagon
               of
               Rome
               was
               cast
               downe
               to
               to
               the
               ground
               ,
               when
               first
               the
               papall
               authoritie
               and
               cells
               of
               superstition
               were
               destroied
               in
               England
               :
               he
               lost
               his
               head
               and
               his
               hands
               ;
               when
               afterward
               papall
               religion
               was
               expelled
               :
               if
               yet
               any
               stumpe
               of
               his
               bodie
               remaine
               ,
               we
               doubt
               not
               but
               by
               Gods
               grace
               it
               shall
               sooner
               be
               cast
               out
               ,
               then
               his
               former
               wounds
               be
               recouered
               .
               Let
               them
               not
               thinke
               that
               Hezekiah
               will
               suffer
               the
               high
               places
               and
               images
               to
               stand
               ,
               2.
               king
               .
               18.
               4.
               or
               Iosias
               the
               Chemarims
               to
               continue
               ,
               2.
               king
               .
               23.
               4.
               
               Wherefore
               stand
               not
               out
               wilfully
               as
               the
               Ephramites
               ,
               that
               refused
               to
               ioyne
               with
               Iephtah
               against
               Ammon
               ,
               Iud.
               12.
               4.
               neither
               despise
               with
               the
               tribe
               of
               Manasses
               the
               message
               of
               Hezekiah
               ,
               that
               called
               them
               vp
               to
               the
               Passeouer
               ,
               2.
               
               Chron.
               30.
               10.
               
            
             
               Now
               as
               for
               them
               ,
               which
               stand
               apart
               ,
               and
               separate
               themselues
               from
               vs
               ,
               swelling
               with
               an
               opinion
               of
               their
               owne
               greater
               holines
               ,
               
               if
               they
               will
               be
               counted
               among
               the
               tribes
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
               let
               them
               also
               come
               vp
               to
               Ierusalem
               :
               if
               any
               thing
               hath
               grieued
               
               them
               in
               our
               Church
               ,
               let
               them
               not
               feare
               if
               their
               offering
               be
               iust
               ,
               but
               God
               will
               put
               it
               into
               the
               heart
               of
               Hezekiah
               in
               good
               time
               to
               remooue
               euen
               Moses
               brasen
               serpent
               ,
               if
               any
               such
               abuse
               were
               .
               2.
               king
               .
               8.
               4.
               
               I
               wish
               therefore
               and
               exhort
               them
               to
               assemble
               themselues
               with
               the
               hoast
               of
               Israel
               ,
               and
               to
               gather
               Manna
               with
               the
               rest
               of
               Gods
               people
               ,
               least
               if
               they
               goe
               out
               to
               gather
               it
               alone
               ,
               as
               some
               of
               the
               Israelites
               did
               vpon
               the
               seauenth
               day
               ,
               they
               loose
               their
               labour
               ,
               and
               finde
               none
               ,
               Exod.
               16.
               26.
               
               And
               as
               much
               haue
               these
               brethren
               of
               the
               separation
               found
               ,
               since
               they
               first
               went
               out
               from
               vs.
               I
               say
               vnto
               them
               with
               Ambrose
               vpon
               these
               wordes
               of
               the
               Lord
               to
               Moses
               ,
               
                 The
                 place
                 where
                 thou
                 standest
                 is
                 holy
                 ground
                 ,
              
               
               
                 Ecclesia
                 locus
                 sanctus
                 est
                 ,
                 sta
                 ergo
                 in
                 Ecclesia
                 ,
                 sta
                 vbi
                 tibi
                 apparui
                 ,
                 ibi
                 ego
                 tecum
                 sum
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 The
                 Church
                 is
                 the
                 holy
                 place
                 ,
                 stand
                 therefore
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 stand
                 where
                 I
                 appeared
                 vnto
                 thee
                 ,
                 for
                 there
                 I
                 am
                 with
                 thee
                 .
              
               If
               euer
               God
               appeared
               then
               vnto
               them
               ,
               when
               they
               heard
               the
               word
               ,
               and
               made
               their
               praiers
               in
               our
               Church
               assemblies
               ,
               why
               doe
               they
               forsake
               that
               place
               ,
               where
               God
               hath
               manifested
               himselfe
               ?
            
          
           
             
             
               The
               12.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 To
                 the
                 testimonie
                 of
                 Israel
                 ]
              
               That
               is
               ,
               at
               Ierusalem
               was
               the
               arke
               ,
               which
               was
               called
               the
               testimonie
               of
               God
               ,
               because
               in
               them
               were
               kept
               the
               two
               tables
               of
               stone
               ,
               which
               were
               testimonies
               of
               Gods
               presence
               ,
               Exod.
               25.
               16.
               22.
               
               Beside
               before
               the
               Arke
               was
               placed
               the
               pot
               of
               Manna
               ,
               Exod.
               16.
               34.
               and
               some
               good
               while
               after
               ,
               Aarons
               rodde
               that
               budded
               ,
               was
               also
               put
               before
               the
               testimonie
               ,
               Num.
               17.
               10.
               
               So
               then
               these
               three
               monuments
               of
               Gods
               presence
               were
               with
               the
               Arke
               ,
               the
               tabernacle
               of
               the
               testament
               ,
               the
               golden
               potte
               of
               Manna
               ,
               and
               Aarons
               rodde
               that
               budded
               ,
               Hebr.
               9.
               4.
               
               The
               Arke
               thus
               furnished
               is
               called
               the
               testimonie
               ,
               whereby
               God
               did
               testifie
               his
               presence
               to
               his
               Church
               .
               
               The
               same
               also
               are
               the
               sure
               signes
               and
               markes
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               now
               :
               the
               word
               of
               God
               represented
               by
               the
               tables
               of
               the
               law
               ,
               the
               sacraments
               signified
               by
               the
               potte
               of
               Manna
               ,
               and
               discipline
               by
               Aarons
               rodde
               .
               But
               all
               these
               are
               not
               of
               the
               like
               necessitie
               :
               for
               as
               the
               tables
               onely
               were
               within
               the
               arke
               ,
               the
               other
               before
               it
               ,
               Exod.
               25.
               16.
               but
               the
               pot
               of
               Manna
               was
               there
               first
               placed
               ,
               and
               last
               of
               all
               Aarons
               rodde
               :
               so
               the
               most
               essentiall
               note
               of
               the
               
               Church
               ,
               is
               the
               word
               of
               God
               ,
               the
               next
               the
               sacraments
               ,
               the
               third
               is
               discipline
               ,
               which
               so
               much
               concerneth
               not
               the
               beeing
               ,
               as
               the
               well
               beeing
               ,
               not
               the
               essence
               ,
               but
               the
               magnificence
               ,
               not
               the
               making
               ,
               but
               the
               beautifying
               of
               the
               Church
               .
               Now
               that
               these
               are
               testimonies
               to
               the
               Church
               ,
               the
               word
               and
               sacraments
               ,
               as
               the
               arke
               was
               to
               Israel
               ,
               it
               thus
               appeareth
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               Saint
               Paul
               sheweth
               ,
               that
               this
               was
               the
               preferment
               of
               the
               Iewes
               ;
               
                 to
                 them
                 were
                 committed
                 the
                 oracles
                 or
                 words
                 of
                 God
                 ,
              
               rom
               .
               3.
               2.
               hereby
               were
               they
               knowne
               to
               be
               the
               people
               of
               God.
               Likewise
               els
               where
               he
               thus
               describeth
               the
               Church
               :
               
                 Christ
                 doth
                 clense
                 it
                 by
                 the
                 washing
                 of
                 water
                 through
                 the
                 word
                 ,
              
               Eph.
               5.
               26.
               
               These
               two
               thē
               ,
               the
               word
               ,
               and
               the
               sacraments
               ,
               are
               the
               onely
               meanes
               whereby
               the
               Church
               is
               cleansed
               ,
               and
               so
               made
               a
               fit
               habitation
               for
               God.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               S.
               Paul
               reasoneth
               for
               his
               coūtrimen
               ,
               proouing
               them
               to
               be
               the
               Israelites
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               the
               church
               of
               God
               ,
               because
               to
               thē
               belonged
               the
               
                 couenants
                 ,
              
               
               
                 and
                 the
                 giuing
                 of
                 the
                 lawe
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 seruice
                 of
                 God
                 ,
              
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               which
               comprehendeth
               the
               ceremonies
               and
               sacraments
               of
               religion
               .
            
             
               Thus
               the
               Apostle
               prooueth
               himselfe
               a
               member
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               because
               he
               was
               
               circumcised
               ,
               &c.
               and
               as
               touching
               
                 righteousnesse
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 by
                 the
                 lawe
                 ,
                 he
                 was
                 vnreprooueable
                 ,
              
               Philip.
               3.
               6.
               
               He
               was
               both
               imitated
               by
               the
               sacraments
               and
               instituted
               in
               the
               doctrine
               of
               the
               lawe
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Like
               as
               the
               Lord
               threatneth
               to
               remooue
               his
               candlesticke
               from
               the
               Church
               of
               Ephesus
               ,
               Reuel
               .
               2.
               5.
               that
               is
               the
               ministerie
               of
               the
               word
               :
               for
               as
               when
               the
               candle
               &
               candlesticke
               are
               taken
               away
               there
               is
               nothing
               but
               darkenesse
               in
               the
               house
               :
               
               so
               is
               it
               ,
               when
               any
               place
               is
               depriued
               of
               the
               light
               of
               Gods
               word
               :
               These
               two
               then
               ,
               the
               word
               of
               God
               rightly
               preached
               ,
               and
               the
               sacraments
               duly
               administred
               ,
               are
               as
               the
               breasts
               of
               the
               Church
               ;
               and
               where
               these
               are
               not
               ,
               there
               are
               not
               breasts
               ,
               as
               the
               Church
               speaketh
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               not
               yet
               called
               :
               
                 We
                 haue
                 a
                 little
                 sister
                 ,
                 and
                 shee
                 hath
                 no
                 breasts
                 ,
              
               Cant.
               8.
               8.
               
               But
               the
               Church
               saith
               of
               her selfe
               ,
               
                 my
                 breasts
                 are
                 like
                 towers
                 ,
              
               v.
               10.
               that
               is
               ,
               where
               the
               word
               of
               God
               and
               sacraments
               are
               found
               in
               integritie
               ,
               that
               Church
               hath
               goodly
               breasts
               indeede
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               reason
               is
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               most
               like
               that
               God
               will
               bestow
               his
               best
               gifts
               vpon
               his
               beloued
               Church
               :
               he
               will
               plant
               the
               vinyard
               with
               the
               best
               plants
               ,
               Isa.
               5.
               2.
               
               But
               a
               more
               excellent
               gift
               can
               there
               not
               be
               ,
               then
               
               to
               haue
               the
               word
               ,
               the
               statutes
               and
               ordināces
               of
               Gods
               ,
               as
               Moses
               saith
               :
               
                 What
                 nation
                 is
                 so
                 great
                 ,
                 that
                 hath
                 ordinances
                 and
                 lawes
                 so
                 righteous
                 ,
                 as
                 all
                 this
                 lawe
                 which
                 I
                 set
                 before
                 you
                 this
                 day
                 ?
              
               Deut.
               4.
               8.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               then
               ,
               where
               are
               they
               ,
               whether
               papists
               ,
               or
               other
               whatsoeuer
               ,
               that
               say
               ,
               there
               is
               no
               Church
               in
               England
               ?
               haue
               we
               not
               the
               word
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               Sacraments
               ?
               these
               are
               sufficient
               testimonies
               and
               euidences
               of
               Gods
               presence
               .
               To
               say
               ,
               that
               these
               are
               not
               sufficient
               notes
               of
               Gods
               church
               ,
               as
               the
               Papists
               affirme
               ,
               is
               to
               speake
               ignorantly
               &
               falsely
               ,
               for
               whereby
               was
               the
               auntient
               Church
               of
               Israel
               discerned
               ,
               but
               by
               the
               law
               and
               statutes
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               true
               seruice
               of
               his
               name
               ?
               and
               to
               denie
               that
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               hath
               either
               word
               or
               sacramēts
               ,
               as
               some
               schismatickes
               doe
               ,
               is
               to
               speake
               absurdly
               ,
               and
               contrarie
               to
               their
               owne
               knowledge
               :
               for
               if
               that
               be
               Gods
               word
               which
               is
               contained
               in
               the
               olde
               and
               new
               testaments
               ,
               and
               these
               the
               sacraments
               which
               Christ
               hath
               instituted
               ;
               then
               hath
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               both
               ,
               professing
               the
               first
               ,
               and
               celebrating
               the
               second
               .
               We
               teach
               no
               doctrine
               but
               concluded
               out
               of
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               we
               receiue
               no
               sacraments
               ,
               but
               those
               instituted
               by
               our
               Sauiour
               .
            
             
             
               Concerning
               discipline
               ,
               
               neither
               is
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               destitute
               of
               it
               altogether
               :
               for
               where
               the
               word
               of
               God
               and
               the
               sacraments
               are
               ,
               it
               is
               not
               possible
               that
               all
               discipline
               should
               be
               exiled
               :
               I
               graunt
               ,
               that
               the
               discipline
               of
               the
               English
               Church
               may
               be
               much
               amended
               ,
               and
               I
               trust
               in
               time
               shall
               :
               many
               defects
               and
               wants
               are
               amongst
               vs.
               We
               doe
               not
               conceale
               our
               imperfections
               ,
               nor
               iustifie
               what
               is
               amisse
               ;
               
               as
               is
               extant
               in
               the
               booke
               of
               common
               praier
               in
               these
               wordes
               :
               
                 vntill
                 the
                 said
                 discipline
                 may
                 be
                 restored
              
               (
               which
               thing
               is
               much
               to
               be
               wished
               .
               )
               But
               it
               followeth
               not
               ,
               that
               where
               discipline
               is
               wanting
               ,
               the
               Church
               is
               fading
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               infirmitie
               of
               the
               one
               maketh
               a
               nullity
               of
               the
               other
               :
               The
               Church
               of
               the
               Iewes
               thus
               saith
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               :
               
                 If
                 shee
                 be
                 a
                 wall
                 ,
                 we
                 will
                 build
                 vpon
                 her
                 a
                 siluer
                 pallace
                 ,
                 if
                 shee
                 be
                 a
                 doore
                 we
                 will
                 keepe
                 her
                 in
                 with
                 bonds
                 of
                 cedar
                 ,
              
               Can.
               8.
               9.
               
               Shee
               calleth
               her
               sister
               ,
               because
               shee
               had
               a
               wall
               ,
               though
               not
               of
               siluer
               ,
               and
               a
               doore
               ,
               though
               not
               of
               cedar
               .
               And
               England
               ,
               thankes
               be
               to
               God
               ,
               is
               a
               famous
               and
               beutifull
               sister
               to
               all
               reformed
               Churches
               ,
               though
               shee
               may
               haue
               some
               spots
               in
               externall
               matters
               .
               
               But
               our
               trust
               is
               ,
               that
               if
               it
               yet
               be
               not
               ,
               her
               wall
               shall
               be
               made
               more
               costly
               ,
               and
               siluerlike
               ,
               and
               
               her
               doore
               of
               Cedar
               ,
               when
               God
               will
               :
               In
               the
               meane
               time
               ,
               what
               great
               thanks
               should
               we
               giue
               vnto
               God
               ,
               that
               hath
               not
               remooued
               the
               arke
               of
               his
               testimonie
               from
               vs
               ,
               as
               he
               did
               from
               Israel
               ,
               when
               it
               was
               taken
               of
               the
               Philistims
               ?
               1.
               
               Sam.
               4.
               nor
               taken
               away
               the
               candlesticke
               from
               vs
               ,
               as
               from
               Ephesus
               ,
               Reuel
               .
               2.
               5.
               
               Yet
               by
               our
               sinnes
               we
               had
               deserued
               it
               ,
               as
               much
               as
               either
               :
               but
               hath
               in
               his
               mercy
               raised
               vp
               a
               Dauid
               vnto
               his
               church
               ,
               to
               keepe
               and
               defend
               the
               arke
               in
               Ierusalē
               still
               .
            
             
               Lastly
               ,
               as
               these
               are
               testimonies
               and
               euidences
               to
               the
               whole
               Church
               ,
               the
               word
               &
               Sacraments
               ,
               so
               ought
               they
               to
               be
               to
               euery
               true
               mēber
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               that
               euery
               one
               also
               by
               his
               faithfull
               hearing
               of
               the
               word
               ,
               and
               fruitfull
               receiuing
               of
               the
               Sacraments
               ,
               may
               iudge
               himselfe
               a
               liuely
               member
               of
               Christs
               bodie
               ,
               and
               grow
               vp
               thereby
               to
               the
               assurance
               of
               his
               calling
               :
               for
               as
               our
               Sauiour
               saith
               ,
               
                 My
                 sheepe
                 heare
                 my
                 voice
                 ,
              
               Ioh.
               10.
               16.
               
               He
               that
               heareth
               and
               beleeueth
               the
               voice
               of
               Christ
               our
               great
               sheapheard
               ,
               is
               certainely
               one
               of
               his
               sheepe
               .
               By
               the
               fruite
               and
               effect
               of
               the
               word
               a
               man
               may
               discerne
               of
               himselfe
               ,
               whether
               he
               be
               good
               or
               badde
               ground
               :
               for
               if
               the
               word
               fructifie
               in
               him
               ,
               he
               is
               of
               the
               good
               kinde
               ,
               but
               if
               he
               bring
               forth
               
               
                 thornes
                 and
                 briars
                 ,
                 he
                 is
                 a
                 reprooued
                 ground
                 ,
                 neere
                 vnto
                 cursing
                 ,
                 whose
                 ende
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 burned
                 ,
              
               as
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               Heb.
               6.
               8.
               
               So
               Augustine
               to
               the
               same
               purpose
               :
               
                 Quicquid
                 loquimur
                 in
                 nomine
                 Domini
                 Dei
                 imber
                 est
                 ;
                 videte
                 qualis
                 terrae
                 sitis
                 ,
              
               
               
                 qui
                 peior
                 est
                 factus
                 ,
                 ignem
                 speres
                 ,
                 pluviam
                 non
                 accuset
                 ,
                 qui
                 melior
                 factus
                 ,
                 ●orreum
                 speret
                 pluuiam
                 laudes
                 :
                 Whatsoeuer
                 we
                 say
                 vnto
                 you
                 in
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 Lords
                 raine
                 ,
                 see
                 you
                 ,
                 what
                 manner
                 of
                 ground
                 yee
                 be
                 :
                 if
                 thereby
                 ye
                 become
                 worse
                 and
                 bring
                 forth
                 thornes
                 and
                 brambles
                 ,
                 feare
                 the
                 flames
                 ,
                 blame
                 not
                 the
                 showers
                 .
                 If
                 ye
                 are
                 made
                 better
                 ,
                 and
                 bring
                 forth
                 good
                 fruit
                 ,
                 hope
                 for
                 the
                 ●arne
                 ,
                 and
                 praise
                 the
                 raine
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               The
               13.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 To
                 praise
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 the
                 Lord.
                 ]
              
               The
               Prophet
               sheweth
               ,
               what
               is
               the
               chiefe
               ende
               of
               going
               vp
               to
               the
               Lords
               house
               ,
               namely
               to
               praise
               God
               ,
               and
               call
               vpon
               his
               name
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               So
               the
               Lord
               saith
               by
               his
               prophet
               ,
               
                 My
                 house
                 shall
                 be
                 called
                 an
                 house
                 of
                 praier
                 to
                 all
                 nations
                 ,
              
               Isa.
               56.
               7.
               
               And
               Ieremie
               saith
               ,
               prophecying
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               ,
               
                 They
                 shall
                 come
                 and
                 reioyce
                 in
                 the
                 height
                 of
                 Sion
                 ,
              
               chap.
               31.
               12.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               Anna
               praied
               in
               the
               temple
               ,
               
               when
               shee
               asked
               a
               sonne
               of
               God
               :
               
               
                 Shee
                 was
                 troubled
                 in
                 her
                 mind
                 ,
                 and
                 praied
                 to
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 and
                 wept
                 sore
                 ,
              
               1.
               
               Sam.
               1.
               10.
               
               And
               after
               shee
               had
               obtained
               her
               desire
               ,
               shee
               in
               the
               same
               place
               gaue
               thanks
               vnto
               God
               ,
               
                 And
                 Anna
                 praied
                 ,
                 and
                 said
                 ,
                 My
                 heart
                 reioyceth
                 in
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
              
               1.
               
               Sam.
               2.
               1.
               
               To
               this
               spirituall
               vse
               of
               praier
               ,
               Salomon
               consecrated
               the
               Temple
               :
               
                 Heare
                 thou
                 the
                 supplication
                 of
                 thy
                 seruant
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 thy
                 people
                 Israel
                 ,
                 which
                 pray
                 in
                 this
                 place
                 ,
                 and
                 heare
                 thou
                 in
                 the
                 place
                 of
                 thine
                 habitation
                 ,
                 euen
                 in
                 heauen
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 thou
                 hearest
                 ,
                 haue
                 mercie
                 ,
              
               1.
               king
               .
               8.
               30.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               prophet
               compareth
               the
               thāks
               of
               the
               heart
               giuen
               vnto
               God
               ,
               vnto
               fresh
               springs
               :
               
                 all
                 my
                 springs
                 are
                 in
                 thee
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               87.
               7.
               
               And
               the
               prophet
               Ieremie
               speaking
               of
               those
               ,
               that
               reioyce
               before
               the
               Lord
               ,
               saith
               ,
               
                 their
                 soule
                 is
                 as
                 a
                 watered
                 garden
                 ,
              
               chap.
               31.
               12.
               
               He
               thē
               which
               giueth
               not
               thanks
               vnto
               God
               in
               his
               temple
               ,
               is
               as
               a
               barren
               ground
               without
               springs
               :
               but
               he
               which
               praiseth
               the
               name
               of
               God
               ,
               is
               as
               a
               well
               watered
               ground
               refreshed
               with
               sweete
               springs
               .
               What
               becommeth
               the
               temple
               better
               then
               incense
               ,
               and
               where
               should
               it
               be
               rather
               offered
               then
               there
               ?
               now
               the
               odours
               and
               incense
               of
               the
               Saints
               are
               their
               praiers
               ,
               Revel
               .
               8.
               3.
               and
               their
               fatte
               calues
               are
               the
               fruit
               of
               
               their
               lippes
               ,
               as
               the
               prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 We
                 will
                 render
                 the
                 calues
                 of
                 our
                 lippes
                 .
              
               Hosh.
               14.
               3.
               
            
             
               4.
               
               For
               we
               should
               present
               the
               Lord
               with
               our
               best
               gifts
               ,
               if
               any
               thing
               be
               better
               then
               another
               ,
               that
               should
               be
               the
               Lords
               part
               :
               but
               the
               sacrifice
               of
               contrition
               ,
               of
               praise
               &
               thanksgiuing
               ,
               are
               the
               most
               principall
               :
               as
               the
               Prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 Thou
                 desirest
                 not
                 sacrifice
                 ,
                 &c.
                 the
                 sacrifice
                 of
                 God
                 is
                 a
                 contrite
                 heart
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               51.
               16
               ,
               17.
               
               And
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               
                 Let
                 vs
                 by
                 him
                 offer
                 the
                 sacrifice
                 of
                 praise
                 alwaies
                 vnto
                 God
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 fruit
                 of
                 our
                 lippes
                 ,
                 &c.
                 with
                 such
                 sacrifice
                 God
                 is
                 pleased
                 ,
              
               Heb.
               13.
               15
               ,
               16.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               then
               ,
               if
               the
               house
               of
               God
               be
               principally
               ordained
               for
               praier
               ,
               preaching
               ,
               and
               praising
               of
               God
               ,
               as
               Moses
               was
               read
               and
               preached
               in
               the
               synagogue
               ,
               Act.
               15.
               21.
               and
               the
               prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 In
                 his
                 temple
                 doth
                 euery
                 man
                 speake
                 of
                 his
                 glorie
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               29.
               9.
               
               Then
               is
               that
               a
               superstitious
               opinion
               ,
               and
               erroneous
               doctrine
               of
               the
               Papists
               ,
               who
               hold
               ,
               
               that
               the
               Churches
               of
               Christians
               ,
               
                 are
                 chiefely
                 ordained
                 for
                 the
                 sacrifice
                 of
                 the
                 Masse
                 ,
                 not
                 onely
                 or
                 chiefely
                 for
                 praier
                 or
                 preaching
                 ,
                 and
                 administration
                 of
                 the
                 sacraments
                 .
              
               And
               as
               they
               teach
               ,
               so
               they
               practise
               :
               for
               there
               is
               no
               true
               praier
               at
               all
               ,
               
               in
               popish
               Churches
               ,
               all
               beeing
               in
               an
               vnknowne
               
               tongue
               ,
               and
               so
               is
               the
               reading
               of
               scripture
               ,
               beeing
               both
               without
               edifying
               and
               vnderstanding
               :
               there
               is
               no
               singing
               of
               psalmes
               ,
               but
               the
               bellowing
               of
               the
               voice
               ,
               and
               rumbling
               of
               organes
               ,
               onely
               to
               delight
               the
               eare
               .
               In
               stead
               of
               praying
               and
               preaching
               ,
               there
               is
               creeping
               to
               the
               crosse
               ,
               
               kneeling
               to
               images
               ,
               kissing
               of
               the
               pax
               ,
               knocking
               of
               beads
               :
               and
               whereas
               all
               should
               be
               done
               to
               the
               praise
               of
               God
               ,
               they
               sing
               psalmes
               endited
               to
               the
               praise
               and
               honour
               of
               Saints
               ,
               whereas
               the
               Lord
               saith
               in
               the
               scripture
               ,
               
                 Mine
                 honour
                 will
                 I
                 not
                 giue
                 to
                 another
                 ,
              
               Isa.
               42.
               8.
               
               So
               the
               popish
               assemblies
               offend
               two
               waies
               ,
               that
               worship
               ,
               which
               they
               in
               their
               Church
               celebrate
               ,
               they
               doe
               not
               ascribe
               onely
               to
               God
               :
               neither
               is
               it
               their
               principall
               intendement
               to
               come
               together
               to
               praise
               God.
               But
               the
               ancient
               Church
               thought
               otherwise
               .
               
               Augustine
               thus
               saith
               ,
               as
               he
               is
               by
               themselues
               alleadged
               ,
               
                 In
                 oratorio
                 praeter
                 orandi
                 &
                 psallendi
                 cultum
                 nihil
                 agatur
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Let
                 nothing
                 be
                 done
                 in
                 the
                 oratorie
                 or
                 place
                 of
                 praier
                 ,
                 beside
                 praying
                 and
                 praising
                 God.
              
               And
               a
               certaine
               Councell
               calleth
               Churches
               ,
               
                 Orationis
                 ,
              
               
               
                 divini
                 cultus
                 &
                 sacramentorum
                 officinas
                 ,
                 the
                 shoppes
                 of
                 praier
                 ,
                 diuine
                 worship
                 and
                 the
                 sacraments
                 .
              
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               let
               it
               be
               remembred
               ,
               how
               
               much
               the
               people
               of
               England
               are
               bound
               vnto
               God
               ,
               
               that
               this
               holy
               entercourse
               of
               religion
               is
               not
               interrupted
               ,
               but
               that
               they
               may
               both
               publikely
               in
               their
               Churches
               ,
               and
               priuately
               in
               their
               houses
               sing
               psalmes
               to
               the
               praise
               of
               God.
               O
               how
               happie
               are
               we
               ,
               and
               blessed
               be
               the
               name
               of
               God
               ,
               that
               hath
               wrought
               vs
               this
               happinesse
               ,
               
                 that
                 the
                 voice
                 of
                 ioy
                 and
                 deliuerance
                 is
                 still
                 heard
                 in
                 the
                 habitation
                 of
                 the
                 righteous
                 !
              
               Psal.
               118.
               15.
               
               Many
               may
               yet
               remember
               ,
               how
               vncomfortable
               those
               times
               were
               ,
               when
               poperie
               was
               for
               a
               while
               reuiued
               in
               this
               land
               :
               their
               Church
               seruice
               was
               dumbe
               ,
               their
               comming
               thither
               fruitlesse
               ,
               their
               staying
               there
               idle
               ,
               their
               returne
               from
               thence
               ,
               as
               they
               first
               came
               :
               beside
               gazing
               with
               the
               eyes
               ,
               tickling
               with
               the
               eares
               ,
               warbling
               of
               the
               fingers
               ,
               smacking
               with
               their
               lippes
               vpon
               the
               pax
               ;
               sweeping
               the
               ground
               with
               their
               creeping
               ,
               scraping
               with
               their
               feete
               ,
               stretching
               out
               their
               neckes
               at
               the
               eleuation
               time
               :
               there
               was
               nothing
               els
               beside
               these
               outward
               ,
               vaine
               ,
               and
               superstitious
               gestures
               ,
               that
               was
               done
               or
               saide
               to
               the
               edifying
               of
               the
               vnderstanding
               ,
               and
               sanctifying
               of
               the
               affections
               :
               as
               wee
               haue
               cause
               to
               praise
               God
               ,
               for
               the
               first
               happie
               change
               vnder
               Queene
               ELIZABETH
               :
               so
               also
               
               for
               the
               continuance
               vnder
               our
               kings
               Maiestie
               ,
               of
               our
               comfortable
               and
               Christian
               Church
               assemblies
               ,
               where
               the
               minister
               praieth
               ,
               and
               the
               people
               pray
               with
               him
               ,
               he
               preacheth
               and
               they
               vnderstand
               him
               ,
               they
               sing
               vnto
               themselues
               also
               in
               hymnes
               and
               spirituall
               songes
               :
               blessed
               be
               the
               name
               of
               God
               ,
               which
               hath
               performed
               that
               ioyfull
               prophecie
               of
               Ieremy
               :
               
                 Thus
                 saith
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 againe
                 there
                 shall
                 be
                 heard
                 in
                 this
                 place
                 ,
                 &c.
                 the
                 voice
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 which
                 shall
                 say
                 ,
                 praise
                 the
                 Lord
                 of
                 hostes
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 Lord
                 is
                 good
                 ,
                 because
                 his
                 mercie
                 endureth
                 for
                 euer
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 thē
                 that
                 offer
                 the
                 sacrifice
                 of
                 praise
                 in
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
              
               Ierem.
               33.
               10.
               
               Haue
               we
               not
               iust
               cause
               to
               say
               with
               the
               Prophet
               Dauid
               ,
               for
               the
               sweete
               comforts
               that
               we
               finde
               ,
               by
               the
               preaching
               ,
               praying
               ,
               and
               praising
               of
               God
               in
               our
               Churches
               :
               
                 O
                 Lord
                 of
                 Hostes
                 ,
                 howe
                 amiable
                 are
                 thy
                 tabernacles
                 ?
              
               psal
               .
               84.
               1.
               
               When
               sometime
               by
               the
               sweete
               Saints
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               
               as
               Augustine
               saith
               ,
               
                 animi
                 nostri
                 in
                 flammam
                 pietatis
                 mouentur
                 ,
                 Our
                 mindes
                 are
                 inflamed
                 with
                 godly
                 pietie
                 and
                 zeale
                 :
              
               Sometime
               teares
               fall
               from
               our
               eies
               ,
               as
               he
               againe
               saith
               ,
               
                 Cum
                 reminiscor
                 lachrymas
                 meas
                 ,
                 quas
                 fudi
                 ad
                 cantus
                 Ecclesiae
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 When
                 I
                 remember
                 my
                 teares
                 ,
                 which
                 I
                 shedde
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 songs
                 :
              
               sometime
               the
               minde
               is
               instructed
               &
               
               edified
               ,
               as
               the
               same
               father
               also
               saith
               :
               
                 Gratias
                 deo
                 meo
                 ,
              
               
               
                 pulsatori
                 aurium
                 mearum
                 ,
                 illustratori
                 cordis
                 mei
                 :
                 Praise
                 be
                 to
                 God
                 that
                 beateth
                 vpon
                 mine
                 yeares
                 ,
                 and
                 bendeth
                 my
                 heart
                 .
              
            
             
               Thirdly
               ,
               seeing
               Churches
               are
               appointed
               for
               praier
               ,
               
               and
               the
               praise
               of
               God
               ,
               no
               man
               should
               come
               thither
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               lawe
               emptie
               handed
               ,
               so
               nowe
               vnder
               the
               Gospel
               emptie
               hearted
               ;
               as
               the
               Prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 bring
                 an
                 offering
                 ,
                 and
                 enter
                 into
                 his
                 courts
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               96.
               8.
               
               If
               thy
               offering
               be
               not
               readie
               ,
               presse
               not
               into
               Gods
               presence
               :
               and
               what
               kind
               of
               offering
               it
               must
               be
               ,
               the
               Prophet
               also
               sheweth
               ,
               
                 Come
                 before
                 him
                 with
                 praise
                 .
              
               Psal.
               100.
               2.
               
               Wherefore
               their
               comming
               vnto
               the
               Church
               is
               in
               vaine
               ,
               that
               prepare
               not
               themselues
               to
               offer
               vnto
               God
               some
               spirituall
               gift
               :
               as
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               
                 What
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 done
                 then
                 brethren
                 ,
                 when
                 ye
                 come
                 togither
                 ,
                 as
                 euery
                 one
                 of
                 you
                 hath
                 a
                 psalme
                 ,
                 or
                 doctrine
                 ,
                 or
                 a
                 tongue
                 ,
                 or
                 reuelation
                 ,
                 or
                 interpretation
                 ,
                 let
                 all
                 things
                 be
                 done
                 to
                 edifying
                 ,
              
               1.
               
               Cor.
               14.
               26.
               
               Some
               must
               come
               with
               doctrine
               to
               teach
               others
               ,
               some
               with
               reuelation
               ,
               that
               God
               may
               reueale
               his
               wil
               vnto
               thē
               ,
               others
               with
               a
               psalme
               to
               praise
               God
               :
               let
               no
               man
               be
               dumbe
               or
               silent
               ,
               or
               be
               as
               a
               cypher
               in
               the
               Church
               ,
               but
               all
               things
               must
               be
               done
               to
               edifying
               :
               he
               that
               praieth
               ,
               or
               praiseth
               
               God
               ,
               let
               him
               not
               doe
               it
               ,
               as
               many
               ,
               onely
               with
               lip-labour
               ,
               but
               from
               the
               heart
               :
               This
               is
               the
               
                 praise
                 which
                 waiteth
                 for
                 God
                 in
                 Sion
                 .
              
               Psal.
               65.
               1.
               
               Vpon
               which
               wordes
               Augustine
               thus
               well
               inferreth
               ,
               
               
                 Non
                 enim
                 carne
                 canto
                 ,
                 sed
                 corde
                 ,
                 carnem
                 enim
                 sonantem
                 audiunt
                 ciues
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 c●rdis
                 autem
                 sonum
                 audit
                 conditor
                 Ierusalem
                 :
                 I
                 sing
                 not
                 with
                 my
                 flesh
                 ,
                 but
                 with
                 my
                 heart
                 :
                 the
                 sounding
                 flesh
                 delighteth
                 the
                 citizens
                 of
                 Babylon
              
               (
               for
               they
               said
               sing
               vs
               one
               of
               the
               songs
               of
               Sion
               ,
               Psal.
               137.
               3.
               
               )
               
                 but
                 the
                 sounding
                 spirit
                 ,
                 the
                 sounder
                 of
                 Ierusalem
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               The
               14.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 V.
                 5.
                 
                 There
                 are
                 thrones
                 set
                 for
                 iudgement
                 .
                 ]
              
               That
               whereas
               all
               things
               before
               were
               confused
               ,
               there
               was
               no
               order
               ,
               no
               iustice
               ,
               no
               redresse
               of
               errors
               ,
               no
               correction
               of
               offenders
               ,
               now
               Dauid
               had
               constituted
               an
               exact
               politie
               and
               gouernment
               ,
               he
               appointed
               thrones
               of
               iustice
               ,
               where
               euery
               mans
               complaint
               might
               be
               heard
               .
               We
               see
               then
               what
               an
               excellent
               benefit
               it
               is
               ,
               when
               the
               Lord
               giueth
               vnto
               a
               nation
               ,
               a
               fetled
               &
               established
               gouernment
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               As
               the
               Lord
               promiseth
               by
               his
               prophet
               ,
               
                 that
                 if
                 they
                 did
                 sanctifie
                 the
                 Sabbath
                 ,
                 
                 &c.
                 then
                 shall
                 the
                 Kings
                 and
                 the
                 Princes
                 enter
                 in
                 at
                 the
                 gates
                 of
                 this
                 citie
                 ,
                 and
                 shall
                 sitte
                 vpon
                 the
                 throne
                 of
                 Dauid
                 ,
              
               Ier.
               17.
               25.
               
               The
               contrarie
               ,
               the
               taking
               away
               of
               order
               and
               gouernment
               is
               threatned
               as
               a
               curse
               :
               
                 The
                 nobles
                 shall
                 call
                 to
                 the
                 king
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 shall
                 be
                 none
                 ,
                 all
                 the
                 princes
                 thereof
                 shall
                 be
                 as
                 nothing
                 .
              
               Isa.
               34.
               12.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               God
               gaue
               vnto
               his
               people
               ,
               Moses
               his
               faithful
               seruant
               ,
               that
               sat
               to
               iudge
               the
               people
               from
               morning
               to
               night
               ,
               and
               by
               the
               aduise
               of
               Hobab
               his
               father
               in
               law
               ,
               he
               appointed
               other
               inferiour
               gouernonrs
               ,
               both
               to
               ease
               him
               of
               some
               burthen
               ,
               and
               for
               better
               expedition
               for
               the
               people
               ,
               Exod.
               18.
               
               And
               at
               Ephesus
               ,
               what
               would
               haue
               beene
               the
               issue
               of
               that
               tumultuous
               vproare
               ,
               if
               it
               had
               not
               beene
               appeased
               by
               the
               authoritie
               and
               wisdome
               of
               the
               towneclarke
               ?
               who
               among
               other
               wise
               speaches
               said
               vnto
               them
               ,
               
                 If
                 Demetrius
                 haue
                 a
                 matter
                 against
                 any
                 man
                 ,
                 the
                 law
                 is
                 open
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 are
                 deputies
                 ,
                 let
                 them
                 accuse
                 one
                 another
                 ,
              
               Act.
               19.
               38.
               
               And
               what
               miserie
               is
               like
               to
               befall
               a
               commonwealth
               without
               gouernment
               ,
               it
               is
               euident
               by
               the
               historie
               of
               the
               Iudges
               ,
               where
               this
               is
               yeilded
               as
               a
               reason
               ,
               of
               the
               oppression
               of
               the
               children
               of
               Dan
               ,
               Iud.
               18.
               1.
               and
               of
               the
               horrible
               adulterie
               committed
               
               by
               the
               men
               of
               Gibeah
               ,
               with
               the
               Leuites
               wife
               ,
               Iud.
               19.
               1.
               
               
                 In
                 those
                 daies
                 ,
                 there
                 was
                 no
                 king
                 in
                 Israel
                 .
              
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               men
               without
               a
               gouernour
               ,
               are
               as
               the
               fishes
               of
               the
               sea
               ,
               that
               deuoure
               one
               another
               ,
               Hab.
               1.
               14.
               
               But
               the
               protection
               of
               Magistrates
               and
               gouernours
               ,
               is
               like
               the
               shadow
               of
               a
               great
               tree
               ,
               where
               the
               beasts
               doe
               finde
               shelter
               ,
               and
               the
               birds
               build
               their
               nests
               ,
               Dan.
               4.
               18.
               
               And
               as
               we
               see
               the
               wall
               is
               a
               proppe
               to
               the
               small
               boughes
               ,
               or
               Ivie
               that
               runneth
               vpon
               it
               ,
               Gen.
               49.
               22.
               so
               was
               Ioseph
               to
               his
               brethren
               ,
               and
               euery
               good
               Magistrate
               to
               his
               people
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Therefore
               Iudges
               in
               Scripture
               are
               called
               Gods
               ,
               Exod.
               21.
               6.
               as
               Moses
               was
               to
               Aaron
               ,
               as
               a
               God
               ,
               Exod.
               4.
               16.
               to
               giue
               him
               direction
               .
               And
               for
               this
               cause
               the
               Lord
               endueth
               Magistrates
               ,
               with
               necessarie
               graces
               of
               discerning
               ,
               and
               directing
               ,
               of
               boldnesse
               and
               courage
               ,
               of
               protection
               and
               deliuerance
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               be
               guides
               and
               gouernours
               of
               his
               people
               ,
               and
               distribute
               vnto
               euery
               man
               his
               right
               :
               as
               the
               Lord
               said
               to
               Iosua
               ,
               
                 I
                 wil
                 neuer
                 leaue
                 thee
                 ,
                 nor
                 forsake
                 thee
                 ,
                 be
                 strong
                 and
                 of
                 a
                 good
                 courage
                 ,
                 for
                 vnto
                 this
                 people
                 shalt
                 thou
                 deuide
                 the
                 land
                 for
                 an
                 inheritance
                 .
              
               Ios.
               1.
               5
               ,
               6.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               This
               doctrine
               then
               giueth
               vs
               occasion
               
               herein
               also
               to
               remember
               the
               louing
               kindnes
               of
               God
               towardes
               vs
               ,
               
               that
               ,
               as
               the
               thrones
               haue
               beene
               set
               for
               iudgement
               all
               the
               happie
               and
               peaceable
               raigne
               of
               Q.
               Elizabeth
               :
               so
               they
               doe
               and
               are
               like
               to
               cōtinue
               still
               .
               Many
               feared
               great
               confusion
               to
               fall
               vpon
               the
               land
               ,
               and
               some
               wickedly
               imagined
               ,
               and
               as
               treacherously
               desired
               ,
               that
               this
               famous
               countrie
               might
               haue
               bin
               a
               pray
               for
               the
               Spanyard
               :
               then
               indeede
               the
               thrones
               of
               iudgement
               should
               haue
               beene
               cast
               downe
               ,
               and
               no
               other
               iustice
               should
               haue
               beene
               expected
               but
               by
               the
               sword
               :
               such
               iustice
               as
               Lysander
               shewed
               ,
               when
               the
               Argives
               ,
               who
               seemed
               to
               haue
               better
               right
               ,
               contended
               with
               the
               Lacedemonians
               about
               their
               bounds
               :
               
               he
               drew
               his
               sword
               and
               said
               ,
               
                 He
                 that
                 vseth
                 this
                 can
                 best
                 determine
                 of
                 the
                 bounds
                 and
                 titles
                 of
                 lands
                 .
              
               Much
               that
               like
               was
               the
               Duke
               of
               Medina
               his
               speach
               ,
               the
               king
               of
               Spaines
               factor
               and
               chiefe
               captaine
               for
               the
               pretended
               inuasion
               of
               England
               ,
               
                 ann
                 .
                 88.
                 that
                 his
                 sword
                 knew
                 not
                 to
                 make
                 any
                 difference
                 betweene
                 Papist
                 and
                 Protestant
                 ,
              
               
               
                 if
                 he
                 had
                 preuailed
                 .
              
               The
               same
               reports
               also
               the
               secular
               masse
               priests
               affirme
               ,
               
               that
               Parsons
               should
               thus
               write
               concerning
               the
               king
               of
               Spaine
               ,
               that
               after
               the
               losse
               of
               his
               Armado
               ,
               
                 he
                 ranne
                 to
                 an
                 altar
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 taking
                 a
                 siluer
                 candle
                 sticke
                 ,
                 swore
                 a
                 monstrous
                 oath
                 ,
              
               
               
                 that
                 he
                 would
                 wast
                 not
                 onely
                 all
                 Spaine
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 all
                 his
                 Indies
                 to
                 that
                 candlesticke
                 ,
                 but
                 he
                 would
                 be
                 auenged
                 on
                 England
                 .
              
               But
               thankes
               be
               to
               God
               ,
               these
               cruell
               lords
               ,
               that
               would
               haue
               raigned
               ouer
               vs
               ,
               
               haue
               lost
               their
               hope
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               Psalmist
               saith
               ,
               
                 They
                 haue
                 slept
                 their
                 sleepe
                 ,
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 men
                 of
                 strength
                 haue
                 not
                 found
                 their
                 hands
                 :
                 at
                 thy
                 rebuke
                 ,
                 O
                 Lord
                 ,
                 both
                 the
                 chariot
                 and
                 the
                 horse
                 are
                 cast
                 asleepe
                 .
              
               Psal.
               76.
               5
               ,
               6.
               
               Many
               of
               those
               ,
               which
               gaped
               for
               our
               destruction
               are
               asleepe
               ,
               as
               Pharao
               with
               his
               hoast
               in
               the
               bottome
               of
               the
               sea
               ,
               so
               that
               we
               may
               say
               againe
               with
               the
               prophet
               ,
               
                 Thou
                 hast
                 saued
                 vs
                 from
                 our
                 aduersaries
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 them
                 to
                 confusion
                 that
                 hate
                 vs
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               44.
               7.
               
               Blessed
               be
               God
               ,
               that
               hath
               not
               suffered
               such
               cruell
               lords
               to
               raigne
               ouer
               vs
               ,
               but
               hath
               raised
               vp
               the
               thrones
               of
               iustice
               from
               among
               our selues
               .
               Long
               may
               these
               thrones
               set
               for
               iudgment
               cōtinue
               and
               be
               established
               in
               peace
               ;
               which
               we
               trust
               to
               see
               :
               that
               as
               it
               is
               in
               the
               psalme
               ,
               we
               may
               sing
               :
               
                 Mercie
                 and
                 trueth
                 shall
                 meete
                 ,
                 iustice
                 and
                 peace
                 shall
                 kisse
                 each
                 other
                 ,
              
               Psalm
               .
               85.
               10.
               
               Truth
               &
               vertue
               in
               religion
               bringeth
               forth
               mercie
               and
               equitie
               in
               the
               princely
               administration
               :
               and
               the
               vpright
               sitting
               in
               these
               thrones
               of
               iustice
               ,
               is
               the
               way
               to
               establish
               
               peace
               ,
               as
               Augustine
               well
               saith
               vpon
               these
               wordes
               of
               the
               psalme
               :
               
                 Vultis
                 pacem
                 ,
              
               
               
                 ama
                 &
                 iusticiam
                 ,
                 quia
                 duae
                 amicae
                 sunt
                 iustitia
                 &
                 pax
                 ,
                 ipsae
                 se
                 osculantur
                 ,
                 si
                 amicam
                 pacis
                 non
                 amaueris
                 ,
                 non
                 te
                 amabit
                 pax
                 ,
                 nec
                 veniet
                 ad
                 te
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 If
                 you
                 will
                 haue
                 peace
                 ,
                 loue
                 iustice
                 ,
                 because
                 iustice
                 &
                 peace
                 are
                 two
                 friēds
                 ,
                 they
                 one
                 kisse
                 another
                 :
                 if
                 you
                 loue
                 not
                 the
                 friēd
                 of
                 peace
                 ,
                 peace
                 will
                 not
                 loue
                 thee
                 ,
                 nor
                 come
                 at
                 thee
                 .
              
               God
               graunt
               ,
               that
               both
               in
               the
               Ecclesiasticall
               and
               Ciuill
               state
               of
               this
               kingdome
               ,
               iustice
               and
               peace
               may
               so
               embrace
               the
               other
               ,
               with
               veritie
               and
               truth
               ,
               that
               ,
               if
               it
               be
               Gods
               blessed
               will
               ,
               they
               may
               neuer
               be
               parted
               ,
               nor
               pulled
               asunder
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               15.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 Euen
                 the
                 thrones
                 of
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 Dauid
                 .
                 ]
              
               That
               is
               ,
               God
               had
               giuen
               vnto
               his
               people
               a
               gouernour
               from
               among
               themselues
               :
               as
               the
               Israelites
               say
               to
               Dauid
               ,
               
                 We
                 are
                 thy
                 bones
                 &
                 thy
                 flesh
                 ,
              
               2.
               
               Sam.
               4.
               1.
               as
               also
               an
               vpright
               wise
               and
               iust
               prince
               ,
               
                 that
                 did
                 feed
                 them
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 simplicitie
                 of
                 his
                 heart
                 ,
                 and
                 guided
                 them
                 by
                 the
                 discretion
                 of
                 his
                 handes
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               78.
               72.
               
               It
               is
               then
               an
               vnspeakable
               benefit
               ,
               when
               the
               Lord
               setteth
               vp
               the
               thrones
               of
               Dauid
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               giueth
               vnto
               a
               people
               iust
               gouernours
               ,
               
               and
               the
               same
               not
               strangers
               but
               of
               their
               owne
               bone
               and
               flesh
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               For
               the
               first
               ,
               the
               wise
               man
               saith
               :
               
                 When
                 the
                 righteous
                 are
                 in
                 authoritie
                 ,
                 the
                 people
                 reioyce
                 ,
              
               Prou.
               28.
               2.
               
               Great
               ioy
               there
               is
               ,
               when
               God
               raiseth
               vp
               to
               his
               Church
               vertuous
               rulers
               and
               gouernours
               :
               as
               the
               contrarie
               is
               a
               great
               iudgement
               :
               
                 When
                 the
                 wicked
                 beareth
                 rule
                 the
                 people
                 sigh
                 ,
              
               Prou.
               28.
               2.
               
               For
               the
               other
               :
               the
               Lord
               by
               Moses
               gaue
               them
               this
               law
               ,
               
                 From
                 among
                 thy
                 brethren
                 ,
                 thou
                 shalt
                 make
                 a
                 king
                 ouer
                 thee
                 ,
                 thou
                 shalt
                 not
                 set
                 a
                 stranger
                 ouer
                 thee
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 not
                 thy
                 brother
                 ,
              
               Deut.
               17.
               15.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Such
               an
               one
               was
               Salomon
               ,
               who
               both
               was
               the
               sonne
               of
               Dauid
               ,
               borne
               from
               among
               his
               brethren
               the
               Israelites
               ,
               as
               he
               himselfe
               saith
               ,
               
                 Thou
                 hast
                 kept
                 for
                 Dauid
                 this
                 great
                 mercie
                 ,
                 and
                 hast
                 giuen
                 him
                 a
                 sonne
                 to
                 sit
                 vpon
                 his
                 throne
                 ,
                 as
                 appeareth
                 this
                 day
                 :
              
               as
               also
               he
               praied
               ▪
               vnto
               God
               to
               giue
               him
               an
               vnderstanding
               heart
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               iudge
               the
               people
               righteously
               ,
               1.
               king
               .
               3.
               5.
               9.
               
               Such
               an
               one
               was
               Zorobabel
               ,
               of
               whome
               the
               prophet
               Ieremie
               thus
               testifieth
               ,
               
                 Their
                 noble
                 ruler
                 shall
                 be
                 of
                 themselues
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 gouernor
                 shall
                 proceede
                 from
                 the
                 middest
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 will
                 cause
                 him
                 to
                 draw
                 neere
                 ,
                 and
                 approach
                 vnto
                 me
                 .
              
               Ier.
               30.
               21.
               
               The
               same
               Zorobabel
               
               when
               as
               strangers
               ,
               the
               aduersaries
               of
               Iuda
               and
               Beniamin
               offered
               their
               seruice
               to
               build
               the
               temple
               ,
               he
               refused
               their
               helpe
               ,
               saying
               ,
               
                 It
                 is
                 not
                 for
                 you
                 ,
                 but
                 for
                 vs
                 to
                 build
                 an
                 house
                 vnto
                 our
                 God
                 ,
              
               Ezra
               4.
               3.
               
               This
               was
               a
               double
               blessing
               ,
               that
               both
               God
               gaue
               them
               a
               ruler
               of
               their
               owne
               kinred
               ,
               and
               such
               an
               one
               ,
               as
               was
               zealous
               to
               build
               the
               Lords
               house
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Such
               gouernours
               the
               prophet
               compareth
               to
               nailes
               whereupon
               hang
               the
               vessels
               and
               other
               instruments
               ,
               Isa.
               22.
               23.
               and
               they
               are
               as
               pillars
               ,
               that
               beare
               vp
               the
               kingdome
               ,
               Psal.
               75.
               3.
               and
               as
               the
               staffe
               whereupon
               a
               man
               leaneth
               ,
               Ier.
               48.
               17.
               
               So
               is
               a
               mercifull
               and
               righteous
               prince
               ,
               vpon
               whome
               the
               glorie
               and
               safetie
               of
               the
               kingdome
               dependeth
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               And
               great
               cause
               the
               people
               haue
               to
               ioy
               in
               a
               good
               Prince
               ,
               because
               the
               whole
               realme
               receiueth
               a
               blessing
               because
               of
               him
               ,
               as
               the
               wise
               man
               saith
               ,
               
                 By
                 a
                 man
                 of
                 vnderstanding
                 and
                 wisdome
                 a
                 land
                 endureth
                 long
                 ,
              
               Prou.
               28.
               2.
               
               And
               a
               Prince
               borne
               of
               the
               kings
               seede
               and
               of
               the
               royall
               blood
               ,
               must
               needes
               be
               more
               kind
               and
               naturall
               to
               his
               people
               ,
               then
               a
               stranger
               .
               Such
               an
               one
               was
               Eliakim
               ,
               
                 as
                 a
                 father
                 of
                 the
                 inhabitants
                 of
                 Ierusalem
                 .
              
               Isa.
               22.
               21.
               
            
             
             
               5.
               
               First
               then
               ,
               if
               the
               thrones
               of
               Dauid
               must
               be
               set
               for
               iudgement
               ,
               and
               all
               causes
               there
               tried
               ,
               
               then
               it
               followeth
               that
               Dauid
               must
               not
               be
               excluded
               from
               the
               cognizance
               ,
               and
               iudgement
               of
               causes
               Ecclesiasticall
               :
               and
               so
               was
               it
               practised
               in
               his
               raigne
               .
               For
               Dauid
               distributed
               vnto
               the
               Leuites
               their
               offices
               ,
               and
               appointed
               the
               courses
               of
               the
               priests
               the
               sonnes
               of
               Aaron
               ,
               1.
               
               Chron.
               23.
               24.
               
               The
               chiefe
               gouernment
               both
               in
               Ecclesiasticall
               and
               Ciuill
               cause
               belonged
               vnto
               Dauids
               throne
               .
               From
               whence
               it
               is
               necessarily
               inferred
               ,
               that
               euery
               king
               ought
               to
               be
               chiefe
               in
               all
               causes
               within
               his
               kingdome
               ,
               and
               that
               what
               forraine
               potentate
               soeuer
               entermedleth
               ,
               he
               is
               to
               be
               held
               an
               vsurper
               :
               so
               that
               by
               the
               word
               of
               God
               the
               Pope
               is
               no
               more
               to
               meddle
               with
               the
               managing
               of
               Ecclesiasticall
               causes
               within
               the
               realme
               ,
               then
               the
               king
               of
               Spaine
               is
               to
               deale
               with
               temporall
               .
               The
               prince
               then
               is
               both
               to
               prescribe
               lawes
               according
               to
               the
               word
               of
               God
               ,
               euen
               in
               matters
               Ecclesiasticall
               ,
               and
               to
               see
               them
               executed
               ,
               though
               not
               in
               his
               owne
               person
               ,
               and
               to
               punish
               transgressions
               :
               for
               as
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               
                 He
                 beareth
                 not
                 the
                 sword
                 for
                 naught
                 ,
                 for
                 he
                 is
                 the
                 minister
                 of
                 God
                 to
                 take
                 vengeance
                 on
                 him
                 that
                 doth
                 euill
                 .
              
               Rom.
               13.
               4.
               
               It
               belongeth
               
               then
               to
               the
               Prince
               to
               correct
               all
               sorts
               of
               offendours
               ,
               whether
               Ciuill
               or
               Ecclesiasticall
               persons
               ,
               for
               the
               Apostles
               words
               are
               generall
               :
               none
               that
               doth
               euill
               ,
               is
               exempted
               frō
               the
               Princes
               sword
               .
            
             
               And
               that
               it
               is
               gods
               ordinance
               to
               stirre
               vp
               the
               hearts
               of
               princes
               to
               reforme
               religion
               and
               Ecclesiasticall
               abuses
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               leaue
               it
               wholly
               to
               the
               disposition
               of
               the
               cleargie
               ;
               it
               is
               euident
               by
               the
               experience
               of
               al
               ages
               :
               wherein
               the
               greatest
               reformations
               haue
               beene
               wrought
               by
               kings
               ,
               not
               by
               priests
               .
               As
               in
               Iuda
               ,
               the
               godly
               kings
               ,
               Asa
               ,
               Iehosaphat
               ,
               Hezekiah
               ,
               Iosias
               ,
               were
               the
               greatest
               purgers
               ,
               and
               reformers
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               &
               most
               zealous
               for
               Gods
               house
               :
               so
               were
               Zerubbabel
               and
               Nehemiah
               ,
               after
               the
               returne
               from
               captiuitie
               ,
               the
               one
               for
               the
               building
               of
               the
               temple
               ,
               the
               other
               for
               repairing
               the
               cittie
               most
               forward
               .
               Whereas
               the
               Priests
               were
               often
               found
               vnfaithfull
               ,
               and
               very
               backeward
               in
               the
               Lords
               worke
               :
               such
               was
               Vriah
               the
               high
               Priest
               ,
               in
               the
               daies
               of
               Ahaz
               ,
               that
               consented
               to
               his
               idolatrie
               ,
               2.
               
               King.
               16.
               16.
               
               When
               Ezra
               returned
               from
               Babel
               ,
               the
               priests
               were
               the
               hindmost
               ,
               for
               whome
               he
               staied
               three
               daies
               ,
               Ezra
               8.
               15.
               
               They
               more
               forward
               then
               any
               ,
               to
               marrie
               strange
               wiues
               ,
               contrarie
               to
               the
               
               law
               .
               
               Ezra
               .
               10.
               18.
               
               One
               of
               the
               high
               priests
               sonnes
               was
               confederate
               with
               Samballat
               ,
               an
               enemie
               to
               Ierusalem
               ,
               Nehem.
               13.
               29.
               
               And
               diuerse
               there
               were
               beside
               of
               the
               priests
               ,
               that
               hindred
               reformation
               ,
               against
               whome
               Nehemiah
               praieth
               ,
               
                 Remember
                 them
                 O
                 lord
                 ,
                 that
                 defile
                 the
                 priesthood
                 :
              
               The
               whole
               burthē
               of
               redressing
               the
               corruptiōs
               of
               the
               church
               ,
               as
               concerning
               the
               keeping
               of
               the
               sabboth
               ,
               the
               putting
               away
               of
               strange
               wiues
               ,
               &
               such
               like
               ,
               lay
               vpon
               Nehemiah
               ,
               cap.
               13.
               19.
               23.
               
               Likewise
               in
               our
               Sauiour
               Christ
               time
               ,
               none
               were
               greater
               adversaries
               to
               the
               gospel
               ,
               then
               the
               high
               priests
               ,
               Annas
               and
               Caiphas
               ,
               and
               Ananias
               to
               S.
               Paul
               ,
               Act.
               23.
               1.
               
               And
               of
               late
               times
               ,
               who
               more
               hindred
               reformation
               in
               the
               Church
               of
               England
               ,
               then
               the
               Pope
               and
               his
               papal
               brood
               ?
               When
               had
               England
               receiued
               the
               gospel
               ,
               if
               God
               had
               not
               stirred
               vp
               the
               heart
               of
               the
               Prince
               to
               embrace
               the
               trueth
               ?
               Is
               it
               like
               that
               the
               pope
               and
               his
               papall
               Hierarchie
               would
               euer
               set
               their
               mindes
               to
               reforme
               the
               Church
               abroad
               ,
               when
               they
               suffer
               such
               abomination
               at
               home
               ?
               Paulus
               the
               third
               made
               some
               semblance
               and
               shew
               of
               reformation
               ,
               when
               he
               set
               certaine
               Cardinals
               aworke
               ,
               as
               Contarenus
               ,
               Sadoletus
               ,
               Polus
               ,
               with
               others
               ,
               to
               certifie
               him
               of
               the
               abuses
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               
               which
               they
               did
               accordingly
               ,
               but
               no
               reredresse
               or
               amendment
               followed
               .
               But
               God
               would
               haue
               this
               worke
               to
               be
               vndertaken
               by
               his
               annointed
               to
               whome
               it
               belongeth
               ,
               receiuing
               their
               direction
               from
               the
               word
               of
               God
               :
               as
               thereto
               he
               stirred
               vp
               the
               heart
               of
               king
               Henrie
               the
               8.
               that
               beganne
               ;
               king
               Edward
               followed
               ,
               Queene
               Elizabeth
               happely
               proceeded
               ,
               and
               what
               is
               yet
               wanting
               either
               in
               Church
               or
               common-wealth
               ,
               we
               trust
               that
               by
               the
               hands
               of
               our
               dread
               Soueraigne
               ,
               that
               nowe
               is
               ,
               it
               may
               ▪
               in
               good
               time
               be
               perfected
               &
               accomplished
               ;
               that
               as
               the
               Prophet
               saith
               of
               Zorobabel
               ,
               he
               shall
               
                 bring
                 forth
                 the
                 head
                 stone
                 thereof
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               finish
               Gods
               worke
               ,
               that
               the
               whole
               Church
               of
               God
               with
               ioyfull
               acclamations
               and
               shoutings
               shall
               crie
               ,
               
                 Grace
                 ,
                 grace
                 vnto
                 it
                 ,
              
               Zach.
               4.
               7.
               
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               here
               is
               the
               great
               ioy
               &
               comfort
               of
               the
               English
               nation
               ,
               that
               there
               wanteth
               not
               a
               man
               of
               the
               house
               of
               Dauid
               ,
               
               to
               sit
               vpon
               the
               throne
               :
               that
               God
               hath
               giuen
               vs
               a
               king
               of
               our
               own
               kindred
               and
               nation
               ,
               of
               the
               familie
               of
               Dauid
               ,
               of
               the
               noble
               race
               of
               the
               kings
               of
               this
               land
               ▪
               not
               a
               stranger
               ,
               or
               forrainer
               ,
               borne
               of
               English
               blood
               and
               parentage
               ,
               brought
               vp
               in
               the
               same
               Island
               ,
               neither
               by
               sea
               nor
               moūtains
               discrimined
               ,
               
               
                 eiusdem
                 labii
              
               of
               the
               same
               speech
               and
               language
               ,
               and
               which
               is
               the
               cheifest
               of
               all
               ,
               of
               the
               same
               faith
               and
               religion
               .
               God
               graunt
               vnto
               his
               Maiestie
               Dauids
               spirit
               ,
               that
               he
               may
               be
               after
               Gods
               own
               heart
               ,
               and
               as
               the
               Scripture
               saith
               of
               Iehosophat
               ,
               
                 that
                 he
                 may
                 walke
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 wayes
                 of
                 his
                 father
                 Dauid
                 ,
              
               2.
               
               Chron.
               17.
               3.
               
               And
               we
               trust
               that
               God
               hath
               sent
               vnto
               vs
               a
               Dauid
               indeede
               ,
               to
               whome
               these
               princely
               qualities
               of
               Dauid
               doe
               agree
               ,
               
               as
               Ambrose
               well
               describeth
               :
               
                 humilis
                 spiritu
                 ,
                 sedulus
                 corde
                 ,
                 facilis
                 affatu
                 ,
                 &c.
                 fortis
                 in
                 praelio
                 ,
                 mansuetus
                 in
                 imperio
                 ,
                 &c.
                 meritò
                 ergo
                 expetitus
                 est
                 ab
                 vniuerso
                 populo
                 ,
                 vt
                 omnes
                 ad
                 eum
                 venirent
                 dicentes
                 ,
                 ecce
                 nos
                 ossa
                 tua
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Hūble
                 in
                 spirit
                 ,
                 diligent
                 in
                 heart
                 ,
                 affable
                 in
                 speech
                 ,
                 valiant
                 in
                 battell
                 ,
                 mercifull
                 in
                 gouernment
                 :
                 therefore
                 he
                 was
                 worthely
                 desired
                 of
                 all
                 that
                 came
                 vnto
                 him
                 saying
                 ,
                 We
                 are
                 thy
                 bones
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               The
               16.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               Ver.
               6.
               
               
                 Pray
                 for
                 the
                 peace
                 of
                 Hierusalem
                 .
                 ]
              
               Now
               beginneth
               the
               second
               part
               of
               this
               Psalme
               ,
               wherein
               the
               prophet
               exhorteth
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               to
               pray
               for
               the
               continuance
               of
               these
               so
               great
               benefits
               before
               rehearsed
               :
               Christians
               then
               are
               taught
               
               in
               all
               their
               praiers
               to
               remember
               to
               remēber
               the
               prosperous
               state
               of
               Christs
               church
               ,
               that
               their
               eie
               should
               not
               onely
               be
               set
               vpon
               their
               own
               priuate
               necessities
               ,
               but
               to
               commend
               vnto
               God
               that
               vniuersal
               bodie
               ,
               whereof
               they
               are
               members
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 Thus
                 the
                 Prophet
                 saith
                 ,
              
               If
               I
               forget
               thee
               ,
               O
               Ierusalem
               ,
               let
               my
               right
               hand
               forget
               to
               play
               :
               if
               I
               doe
               not
               remember
               thee
               ,
               let
               my
               tongue
               cleaue
               to
               the
               roofe
               of
               my
               mouth
               ,
               if
               I
               preferre
               not
               Ierusalem
               to
               my
               cheife
               ioy
               :
               
                 Psal.
                 137.
                 5.
                 6.
                 
                 So
                 the
                 prophet
                 Isay
                 encourageth
                 Gods
                 people
                 to
                 giue
                 thankes
                 for
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 :
              
               Reioyce
               with
               Ierusalem
               ,
               and
               be
               glad
               with
               her
               ,
               all
               ye
               that
               loue
               her
               ,
               reioyce
               for
               ioy
               with
               her
               ,
               all
               ye
               that
               mourne
               for
               her
               ,
               
                 Isay
                 ,
                 66.
              
               10.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               did
               the
               prophet
               Dauid
               remēber
               the
               whole
               state
               of
               Israel
               in
               his
               praiers
               ,
               
                 Deliuer
                 Israel
                 O
                 God
                 out
                 all
                 his
                 troubles
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               25.
               26.
               
               Thus
               the
               faithfull
               vsed
               to
               pray
               ,
               
                 O
                 Lord
                 I
                 pray
                 thee
                 saue
                 now
                 ;
                 I
                 pray
                 thee
                 now
                 giue
                 prosperitie
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               118.
               25.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Like
               as
               then
               ,
               when
               Moses
               by
               Gods
               commandement
               made
               the
               tabernacle
               ,
               euery
               one
               brought
               according
               to
               his
               ability
               ,
               some
               iewels
               of
               gold
               ,
               some
               purple
               ,
               some
               fine
               linnen
               ,
               some
               rammes
               skins
               and
               badgers
               skins
               ,
               &c.
               Exod.
               35.
               23.
               24.
               
               So
               should
               
               euery
               one
               helpe
               forward
               the
               peace
               and
               prosperitie
               of
               the
               Church
               :
               princes
               by
               their
               authoritie
               ,
               ministers
               by
               encouraging
               and
               exhorting
               all
               men
               by
               their
               heartie
               praiers
               and
               desires
               .
               If
               such
               be
               the
               loue
               of
               the
               saints
               to
               the
               Church
               ,
               
                 that
                 they
                 delight
                 in
                 the
                 stones
                 thereof
                 ,
                 and
                 haue
                 pittie
                 on
                 the
                 dust
                 thereof
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               102.
               14.
               that
               is
               ,
               forgot
               her
               not
               in
               her
               greatest
               affliction
               &
               humilitie
               :
               how
               much
               greater
               cause
               is
               there
               to
               beare
               affection
               to
               her
               in
               her
               beautie
               and
               prosperitie
               ?
            
             
               4.
               
               For
               in
               praying
               for
               the
               peace
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               we
               doe
               also
               pray
               for
               our selues
               ,
               to
               whome
               that
               benefit
               of
               peace
               redoundeth
               :
               as
               it
               is
               in
               the
               Psalme
               ,
               
                 All
                 nations
                 shall
                 blesse
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 be
                 blessed
                 in
                 him
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               72.
               17.
               
               They
               which
               blessed
               the
               Prince
               in
               their
               praiers
               ,
               did
               also
               in
               so
               doing
               procure
               a
               blessing
               to
               themselues
               .
               By
               the
               same
               reason
               the
               prophet
               mooueth
               the
               people
               to
               pray
               for
               the
               prosperitie
               of
               Babel
               :
               
                 Seeke
                 the
                 prosperitie
                 of
                 the
                 citie
                 ,
                 whether
                 I
                 haue
                 caused
                 you
                 to
                 be
                 caried
                 away
                 captiue
                 ,
                 and
                 pray
                 vnto
                 the
                 Lord
                 for
                 it
                 :
                 for
                 in
                 the
                 peace
                 thereof
                 ,
                 shall
                 you
                 haue
                 peace
                 .
              
               Ier.
               29.
               7.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               then
               their
               securitie
               is
               here
               reprooued
               ,
               that
               in
               their
               praiers
               ,
               thinke
               to
               appropriate
               Gods
               fauour
               to
               themselues
               ,
               onely
               making
               mention
               of
               their
               owne
               
               wants
               ,
               
               not
               regarding
               the
               necessities
               of
               the
               Church
               .
               Such
               was
               the
               Pharisies
               praier
               ,
               that
               onely
               boasted
               of
               his
               owne
               gifts
               ,
               and
               gaue
               thanks
               for
               himselfe
               :
               he
               despised
               the
               poore
               Publican
               ,
               whome
               he
               saw
               not
               farre
               off
               smiting
               and
               knocking
               vpon
               his
               breast
               :
               charitie
               might
               haue
               mooued
               him
               ,
               by
               his
               praiers
               to
               haue
               helped
               ,
               whome
               he
               saw
               so
               to
               be
               perplexed
               ,
               Luk.
               18.
               
               This
               vaine-glorious
               seruice
               and
               
                 selfe
                 loue
              
               of
               this
               Pharisie
               ,
               was
               nothing
               pleasing
               or
               acceptable
               vnto
               God
               ,
               no
               more
               is
               their
               praier
               ,
               that
               onely
               seeke
               their
               owne
               things
               ,
               and
               are
               not
               touched
               with
               compassion
               toward
               the
               afflicted
               members
               of
               Christ
               ,
               neither
               reioice
               in
               the
               welfare
               of
               Gods
               Church
               ,
               but
               are
               tickled
               onely
               with
               the
               ioy
               of
               their
               owne
               prosperitie
               .
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               if
               they
               be
               worthie
               of
               reproofe
               ,
               that
               are
               negligent
               in
               procuring
               the
               peace
               of
               their
               Church
               by
               their
               praiers
               ,
               they
               are
               much
               more
               to
               be
               blamed
               ,
               that
               are
               too
               diligent
               to
               disturbe
               the
               same
               by
               their
               vncharitable
               practises
               .
               What
               els
               can
               be
               thought
               of
               those
               ,
               who
               haue
               stepped
               forth
               ,
               and
               by
               their
               straunge
               nouelties
               and
               paradoxes
               corrupted
               the
               doctrine
               of
               the
               Church
               ?
               and
               whereas
               Protestants
               were
               before
               of
               one
               iudgement
               and
               consent
               in
               religion
               ,
               
               they
               haue
               distracted
               many
               ,
               
               and
               perswaded
               some
               to
               like
               and
               affect
               their
               singular
               conceits
               .
               This
               haue
               they
               aduentured
               to
               doe
               ,
               not
               sowing
               their
               homely
               seede
               onely
               in
               sermons
               ,
               but
               dispersing
               the
               same
               in
               their
               writings
               ,
               to
               the
               great
               offence
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Christ.
               From
               this
               fountaine
               haue
               sprung
               forth
               these
               ,
               and
               such
               other
               whirlepit
               points
               ,
               and
               bubbles
               of
               new
               doctrine
               ,
               
               
                 that
                 ▪
                 Christ
                 is
                 not
                 originally
                 God
                 :
                 that
                 the
                 Scriptures
                 are
                 not
                 the
                 onely
                 meanes
                 ,
                 concerning
                 God
                 of
                 all
                 that
                 profitably
                 we
                 know
                 :
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 not
                 alone
                 compleat
                 to
                 euerlasting
                 felicitie
                 :
                 that
                 the
                 word
                 of
                 God
                 cannot
                 possibly
                 assure
                 vs
                 ,
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 word
                 of
                 God
                 :
                 that
                 mans
                 will
                 is
                 apt
                 naturally
                 without
                 grace
                 ,
                 to
                 take
                 or
                 refuse
                 any
                 particular
                 obiect
                 whatsoeuer
                 presented
                 vnto
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 consequently
                 to
                 beleeue
                 :
                 that
                 mens
                 naturall
                 workes
                 ,
                 or
                 to
                 do●
                 that
                 ,
                 which
                 nature
                 telleth
                 vs
                 (
                 without
                 grace
                 )
                 must
                 needes
                 be
                 acceptable
                 to
                 God
                 :
                 that
                 there
                 are
                 workes
                 of
                 supererrogation
                 ,
                 that
                 a
                 man
                 can
                 doe
                 now
                 ,
                 and
                 God
                 approoue
                 more
                 then
                 he
                 cōmandeth
                 :
                 that
                 to
                 be
                 preserued
                 from
                 all
                 sinne
                 in
                 this
                 life
                 ,
                 is
                 not
                 vnpossible
                 :
                 that
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Rome
                 (
                 as
                 it
                 now
                 standeth
                 )
                 is
                 the
                 familie
                 of
                 Christ
                 :
                 that
                 idolatours
                 ,
                 wicked
                 heretikes
                 are
                 members
                 of
                 the
                 visible
                 Church
                 :
                 that
                 there
                 is
                 in
                 orders
                 giuen
                 an
                 indeleble
                 character
                 :
                 that
                 
                 they
                 haue
                 power
                 to
                 make
                 Christ
                 bodie
                 ,
                 &c.
                 that
                 sacraments
                 doe
                 giue
                 and
                 conferre
                 ,
                 grace
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 instruments
                 of
                 iustification
                 :
                 that
                 they
                 are
                 as
                 necessarie
                 in
                 their
                 place
                 ,
                 and
                 no
                 lesse
                 required
                 then
                 beleefe
                 it selfe
                 :
                 that
                 the
                 soules
                 of
                 infants
                 dying
                 without
                 baptisme
                 are
                 damned
                 :
                 which
                 must
                 be
                 the
                 meaning
                 of
                 these
                 words
                 ,
                 the
                 Church
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 in
                 her
                 lieth
                 ,
                 by
                 denying
                 the
                 meanes
                 ,
                 doth
                 cast
                 away
                 their
                 soules
                 .
              
               All
               which
               positions
               ▪
               with
               others
               ,
               are
               both
               contrarie
               to
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               to
               the
               iudgement
               of
               protestant
               writers
               ,
               and
               the
               most
               of
               them
               opposite
               to
               the
               articles
               of
               religion
               in
               the
               church
               of
               England
               established
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               faith
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Scotland
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               kings
               Maiesties
               preface
               to
               the
               answer
               of
               the
               Apologicall
               epistle
               ,
               as
               shall
               hereafter
               (
               if
               God
               will
               )
               elswhere
               be
               more
               at
               large
               declared
               :
               and
               hath
               beene
               alreadie
               by
               some
               English
               protestants
               sufficiently
               prooued
               :
               Yet
               thus
               haue
               some
               men
               beene
               bolde
               to
               teach
               and
               write
               ,
               who
               ,
               as
               some
               schismatikes
               and
               headstrong
               sectaries
               haue
               disturbed
               the
               peace
               of
               the
               Church
               one
               way
               ,
               in
               externall
               matters
               which
               concerned
               the
               discipline
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               they
               haue
               troubled
               the
               Church
               another
               way
               ,
               in
               opposing
               themselues
               by
               new
               quirkes
               and
               deuises
               to
               the
               soundnes
               of
               doctrine
               among
               Protestants
               
               alwaies
               professed
               .
               It
               is
               high
               time
               that
               our
               Elisha
               should
               cast
               salt
               into
               the
               springs
               to
               heale
               the
               bitter
               waters
               :
               and
               that
               our
               princely
               shepheard
               driue
               vs
               altogether
               to
               greene
               pastures
               ,
               that
               none
               be
               suffered
               to
               straggle
               by
               themselues
               and
               seeke
               their
               meate
               apart
               from
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               flocke
               :
               
               that
               as
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               
                 we
                 may
                 proceede
                 by
                 one
                 rule
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 may
                 minde
                 one
                 thing
                 ,
              
               Philip.
               3.
               17.
               
               Ambrose
               very
               well
               toucheth
               this
               point
               ,
               
                 Vinci
                 illi
                 facilè
                 possunt
                 ,
                 vel
                 facilè
                 vitari
                 ,
                 quorum
                 prima
                 propositione
                 omne
                 consilium
                 pectoris
                 proditur
                 :
              
               
               
                 at
                 vero
                 hi
                 ,
                 quibus
                 multa
                 nobiscum
                 paria
                 sunt
                 ,
                 facilè
                 possunt
                 innoxias
                 mentes
                 fraudulenta
                 societate
                 percutere
                 ,
                 dum
                 malorum
                 suorum
                 virus
                 per
                 bona
                 nostra
                 defendunt
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 They
                 may
                 easily
                 be
                 confuted
                 ,
                 or
                 auoided
                 ,
                 which
                 at
                 the
                 first
                 dash
                 ,
                 bewray
                 all
                 their
                 counsaile
                 :
                 but
                 they
                 ,
                 which
                 agree
                 with
                 vs
                 in
                 many
                 points
                 ,
                 may
                 easily
                 deceiue
                 simple
                 mindes
                 by
                 their
                 subtile
                 secrecie
                 ,
                 while
                 they
                 bolster
                 out
                 their
                 poisonfull
                 doctrine
                 by
                 some
                 conformitie
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               The
               17.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 They
                 shall
                 prosper
                 that
                 loue
                 thee
                 .
                 ]
              
               They
               ,
               which
               doe
               but
               beare
               good
               will
               vnto
               Sion
               ,
               shall
               prosper
               :
               their
               louing
               affection
               to
               
               Gods
               house
               ,
               shall
               not
               be
               forgotten
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               So
               the
               Lord
               by
               Isaak
               saith
               to
               Iacob
               ;
               
                 They
                 shall
                 be
                 cursed
                 ,
                 that
                 curse
                 thee
                 ,
                 and
                 blessed
                 are
                 they
                 ,
                 that
                 blesse
                 thee
                 ,
              
               Gen.
               27.
               29.
               
               Likewise
               the
               Prophet
               Dauid
               saith
               ,
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 is
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 that
                 vphold
                 my
                 soule
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               54.
               4.
               
               Our
               Sauiour
               promiseth
               ,
               that
               he
               which
               giueth
               but
               a
               cuppe
               of
               cold
               water
               to
               any
               of
               his
               little
               ones
               in
               the
               name
               of
               a
               disciple
               should
               not
               loose
               his
               reward
               ,
               Math.
               10.
               42.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               Laban
               was
               prospered
               for
               Iacobs
               sake
               ,
               Gen.
               30.
               27.
               because
               he
               succoured
               and
               entertained
               him
               in
               his
               house
               .
               The
               Lord
               blessed
               Obed-Edom
               and
               all
               his
               house
               because
               of
               the
               arke
               ,
               2.
               
               Sam.
               6.
               11.
               he
               receiued
               it
               into
               his
               house
               ,
               and
               had
               a
               loue
               and
               respect
               vnto
               it
               ,
               therefore
               the
               Lord
               shewed
               him
               fauour
               againe
               .
               Thus
               god
               deliuered
               Ebedmelech
               the
               Moore
               ,
               because
               he
               releeued
               and
               fauoured
               the
               prophet
               Ieremie
               ,
               cap.
               39.
               18.
               
               Ierem.
               And
               contrariwse
               they
               are
               accursed
               ,
               that
               doe
               hate
               the
               church
               of
               God.
               What
               gained
               Ismael
               by
               mocking
               of
               Isaack
               ?
               he
               was
               cast
               out
               of
               his
               fathers
               house
               ,
               Gen.
               21.
               9.
               10.
               
               Or
               what
               did
               it
               profit
               Abimelech
               to
               slaie
               his
               brethren
               ,
               the
               sonnes
               of
               noble
               Ierubball
               ?
               was
               he
               not
               himselfe
               slaine
               ,
               his
               braine
               pan
               broken
               with
               
               a
               peece
               of
               a
               milstone
               ,
               and
               after
               thrust
               thorough
               by
               his
               page
               ?
               Iudg.
               9.
               52.
               53.
               
               And
               Saul
               had
               good
               experience
               ,
               what
               it
               is
               to
               persecute
               the
               innocents
               ,
               and
               to
               hate
               Gods
               seruants
               :
               he
               put
               the
               priests
               to
               death
               ,
               and
               caused
               Doeg
               in
               one
               day
               to
               kill
               of
               them
               85.
               persons
               ,
               he
               chased
               Dauid
               from
               place
               to
               place
               :
               what
               was
               the
               issue
               hereof
               ?
               he
               himselfe
               was
               ouercome
               in
               battell
               ,
               and
               desperately
               died
               vpon
               his
               owne
               sword
               ,
               1.
               
               Sam.
               31.
               4.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Like
               as
               then
               the
               Prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 in
                 thy
                 light
                 shall
                 we
                 see
                 light
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               36.
               9.
               as
               a
               man
               by
               beholding
               the
               light
               ,
               is
               himselfe
               lightened
               ;
               so
               they
               which
               loue
               the
               light
               of
               Gods
               trueth
               shining
               in
               his
               Church
               ,
               shall
               themselues
               find
               light
               and
               comfort
               by
               it
               .
               The
               Lord
               is
               said
               to
               turne
               the
               bed
               of
               the
               mercifull
               man
               in
               his
               sickenesse
               ,
               Psal.
               41.
               3.
               that
               as
               the
               turning
               and
               beating
               of
               the
               ficke
               mans
               couch
               doeth
               yeild
               more
               ease
               and
               pleasant
               rest
               to
               the
               sicke
               and
               weary
               bones
               :
               so
               the
               Lord
               doth
               minister
               spirituall
               comfort
               and
               refreshing
               to
               the
               soule
               of
               that
               man
               ,
               that
               hath
               beene
               a
               comfort
               vnto
               others
               .
               In
               this
               respect
               it
               is
               said
               in
               the
               Canticles
               ,
               
                 Thy
                 name
                 is
                 as
                 an
                 ointment
                 poured
                 out
                 ,
                 therefore
                 the
                 virgins
                 loue
                 thee
                 ,
              
               Cant.
               1.
               2.
               that
               like
               as
               they
               which
               are
               neere
               vnto
               a
               
               precious
               ointment
               powred
               out
               ,
               though
               they
               were
               not
               annointed
               with
               it
               ,
               yet
               they
               are
               filled
               with
               the
               fauour
               of
               it
               .
               So
               they
               which
               loue
               Christs
               Church
               ,
               where
               this
               oyntment
               is
               powred
               out
               ,
               shall
               haue
               the
               pleasant
               sauour
               and
               smell
               thereof
               in
               their
               welfare
               and
               prosperitie
               :
               
                 they
                 shall
                 prosper
                 that
                 loue
                 thee
                 .
              
            
             
               4.
               
               For
               the
               loue
               that
               is
               shewed
               to
               any
               of
               Christs
               members
               Christ
               accepteth
               ,
               as
               bestowed
               vpon
               himselfe
               :
               
                 In
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 he
                 did
                 it
                 to
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 least
                 of
                 these
                 ,
                 ye
                 did
                 it
                 vnto
                 me
                 ,
              
               Math.
               25.
               45.
               
               And
               therefore
               Christ
               wil
               recompence
               the
               loue
               of
               such
               ,
               they
               shall
               prosper
               themselues
               and
               be
               blessed
               in
               it
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               according
               to
               this
               rule
               ,
               
                 They
                 shall
                 prosper
                 that
                 loue
                 thee
                 ,
              
               
               it
               were
               good
               for
               vs
               to
               measure
               the
               current
               of
               many
               accidents
               in
               the
               world
               :
               there
               shall
               we
               see
               the
               miserable
               ende
               and
               vnprosperous
               successe
               of
               such
               ,
               as
               were
               enemies
               to
               Gods
               Church
               ,
               and
               the
               happie
               estate
               and
               blessed
               progresse
               of
               such
               ,
               as
               were
               friends
               and
               louers
               of
               it
               .
               What
               hath
               beene
               the
               ende
               of
               those
               treacherous
               practisers
               against
               the
               Lords
               annointed
               our
               late
               Soueraigne
               ,
               and
               of
               those
               haters
               of
               religion
               ?
               I
               meane
               Babington
               ,
               Ballard
               ,
               Arden
               ,
               Sommeruile
               ,
               Sherwin
               ,
               
               Parrie
               ,
               Lopez
               ,
               Squire
               ,
               with
               the
               rest
               :
               they
               brought
               themselues
               to
               a
               shamefull
               ,
               but
               well
               deserued
               death
               ,
               and
               haue
               left
               behind
               them
               a
               perpetuall
               note
               of
               infamie
               ,
               howsoeuer
               the
               Pope
               hath
               canonized
               thē
               for
               martyrs
               of
               his
               Church
               .
               Fit
               saints
               for
               such
               a
               chappell
               ,
               and
               worthie
               inhabitants
               of
               the
               Popes
               heauen
               .
               But
               God
               shall
               prosper
               the
               faithfull
               endeauours
               of
               his
               seruants
               :
               the
               teares
               ,
               which
               they
               shed
               in
               their
               praiers
               for
               Gods
               Church
               ,
               shall
               be
               put
               into
               the
               Lords
               bottles
               ,
               Psal.
               56.
               8.
               
               
                 They
                 shall
                 eate
                 the
                 bread
                 in
                 the
                 sweate
                 of
                 their
                 browes
                 :
              
               they
               shall
               be
               partakers
               of
               the
               comfort
               and
               prosperitie
               of
               CHRISTS
               Church
               ,
               for
               the
               which
               they
               haue
               trauailed
               .
               And
               now
               I
               trust
               is
               the
               time
               ,
               that
               it
               shall
               be
               saide
               to
               all
               that
               loue
               the
               Gospel
               ;
               
                 They
                 shall
                 prosper
                 that
                 loue
                 thee
                 .
              
               
               The
               Gospel
               hath
               by
               Gods
               goodnes
               prospered
               and
               flourished
               aboue
               these
               40.
               yeares
               ,
               and
               now
               ,
               by
               Gods
               goodnes
               ,
               is
               like
               to
               prosper
               still
               :
               God
               shall
               blesse
               both
               Prince
               and
               people
               ,
               as
               he
               hath
               done
               alreadie
               in
               great
               measure
               :
               God
               hath
               brought
               a
               prosperous
               king
               to
               a
               prosperous
               nation
               .
               His
               Maiestie
               the
               Lord
               hath
               aboundantly
               honoured
               :
               in
               one
               day
               aduancing
               him
               to
               the
               princely
               regiment
               of
               an
               honourable
               nation
               ,
               to
               the
               loue
               &
               heartie
               
               desire
               of
               his
               subiects
               ,
               to
               a
               countrey
               professing
               religion
               ,
               to
               the
               treasures
               of
               a
               rich
               prince
               .
               God
               hath
               giuen
               him
               Salomons
               portion
               :
               honour
               ,
               wealth
               ,
               wisdome
               :
               God
               we
               trust
               ,
               shall
               giue
               his
               Maiestie
               grace
               and
               strength
               with
               al
               his
               power
               to
               honour
               him
               againe
               :
               that
               we
               may
               say
               with
               the
               prophet
               ,
               
                 Because
                 the
                 king
                 trusted
                 in
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 mercie
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 high
                 ,
                 he
                 shall
                 not
                 slide
                 :
                 thine
                 hand
                 shall
                 find
                 out
                 all
                 thine
                 enemies
                 ,
                 and
                 thy
                 right
                 hand
                 them
                 that
                 hate
                 thee
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               21.
               7
               ,
               8.
               
               
                 But
                 they
                 that
                 loue
                 him
                 ,
                 shall
                 be
                 as
                 the
                 Sunne
                 that
                 riseth
                 in
                 his
                 might
                 .
              
               Iud.
               5.
               31.
               
            
             
               Secondly
               ,
               seeing
               they
               prosper
               ,
               that
               loue
               and
               beare
               affection
               to
               Ierusalem
               ;
               let
               men
               learne
               to
               shewe
               good
               will
               vnto
               Christs
               Church
               ,
               though
               as
               yet
               they
               be
               no
               ripe
               schollers
               themselues
               in
               Christs
               schoole
               :
               though
               they
               be
               not
               growne
               to
               perfection
               ,
               let
               them
               expresse
               a
               good
               affectiō
               .
               A
               good
               will
               and
               inclination
               ,
               where
               strength
               yet
               faileth
               ,
               is
               accepted
               ,
               and
               a
               readie
               disposition
               is
               not
               reiected
               :
               though
               thou
               be
               not
               yet
               of
               the
               Saints
               ,
               yet
               loue
               the
               Saints
               .
               If
               thou
               likest
               and
               louest
               that
               ,
               thou
               wouldest
               be
               ,
               thou
               maist
               be
               that
               hereafter
               ,
               which
               yet
               thou
               art
               not
               .
               The
               little
               birde
               before
               shee
               flieth
               ,
               flittereth
               with
               her
               wings
               in
               the
               nest
               :
               the
               child
               creepeth
               before
               he
               goeth
               :
               So
               religion
               
               beginneth
               with
               affection
               ,
               and
               deuotion
               proceedeth
               from
               desire
               .
               A
               man
               must
               first
               loue
               ,
               that
               he
               would
               be
               ,
               before
               he
               cā
               be
               that
               which
               he
               loueth
               .
               It
               is
               a
               good
               signe
               ,
               
               when
               a
               man
               affecteth
               that
               ,
               which
               he
               expecteth
               :
               and
               doth
               fauour
               that
               ,
               which
               he
               would
               more
               fully
               sauour
               .
               He
               that
               loueth
               Sion
               ,
               shall
               prosper
               :
               he
               that
               loueth
               vertue
               ,
               shall
               encrease
               and
               prosper
               in
               it
               .
               The
               day
               of
               small
               things
               shall
               not
               be
               despised
               ,
               Zachar.
               4.
               10.
               neither
               shall
               the
               smoking
               flaxe
               be
               quenched
               ,
               Math.
               12.
               20.
               but
               the
               smoake
               shall
               bring
               forth
               fire
               ,
               and
               fire
               shall
               breake
               forth
               into
               a
               flame
               .
               The
               good
               desire
               of
               the
               heart
               shall
               be
               recompenced
               with
               the
               encrease
               of
               the
               thing
               desired
               :
               and
               as
               it
               is
               saide
               of
               the
               mariners
               ,
               
                 God
                 bringeth
                 them
                 to
                 the
                 hauen
                 ,
                 where
                 they
                 would
                 be
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               107.
               30.
               so
               the
               Lord
               conducteth
               them
               to
               the
               hauen
               of
               spirituall
               comfort
               ,
               that
               long
               after
               it
               .
               And
               so
               as
               Augustine
               well
               saith
               ,
               
                 Habet
                 proximus
                 aliquam
                 gratiam
                 ,
              
               
               
                 ama
                 illum
                 &
                 tua
                 est
                 ,
                 tu
                 habes
                 aliam
                 ,
                 amet
                 te
                 ,
                 &
                 sua
                 est
                 .
                 Thy
                 neighbour
                 hath
                 a
                 certaine
                 grace
                 loue
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 is
                 thine
                 ,
                 thou
                 hast
                 an
                 other
                 grace
                 let
                 him
                 loue
                 thee
                 ,
                 and
                 it
                 is
                 his
                 also
                 .
              
               Thus
               shall
               we
               finde
               that
               saying
               of
               Wisdome
               in
               the
               Prouerbs
               to
               be
               most
               true
               :
               
                 I
                 loue
                 them
                 that
                 loue
                 me
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 that
                 seeke
                 me
                 earely
                 shall
                 
                 finde
                 me
                 ,
              
               Prou.
               8.
               17.
               
               Like
               as
               he
               that
               earnestly
               seeketh
               that
               which
               he
               misseth
               ,
               shall
               finde
               it
               ,
               so
               whosoeuer
               desireth
               the
               grace
               of
               God
               ,
               shall
               not
               be
               deceiued
               .
               And
               like
               as
               amongst
               men
               ,
               he
               that
               is
               friendly
               shall
               find
               friends
               ,
               Prou.
               18.
               24.
               which
               agreeth
               to
               that
               vsuall
               saying
               ,
               
                 Vt
                 ameris
                 ,
                 amabilis
                 esto
                 ,
              
               shew
               thy selfe
               louely
               ,
               if
               thou
               wilt
               be
               loued
               againe
               :
               So
               is
               it
               betweene
               vs
               and
               God
               ,
               he
               loueth
               those
               that
               loue
               him
               ,
               and
               yet
               it
               is
               most
               true
               ,
               that
               he
               first
               loued
               vs
               ,
               that
               we
               should
               loue
               him
               againe
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               18.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               
                 Peace
                 be
                 within
                 thy
                 walls
                 ,
                 and
                 plenteousnes
                 within
                 thy
                 palaces
                 .
                 ]
              
               Some
               doe
               read
               ,
               peace
               be
               in
               thy
               strength
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ;
               so
               Hierome
               and
               the
               Septuagint
               .
               The
               word
               
                 cheel
                 ,
              
               signifieth
               both
               an
               armie
               ,
               or
               a
               wall
               or
               fortresse
               :
               and
               properly
               it
               signifieth
               the
               rampart
               &
               defence
               before
               the
               wall
               ,
               which
               is
               
                 antemurale
                 ,
              
               as
               Arias
               translateth
               ,
               or
               as
               Tremellius
               ,
               
                 praemunitio
                 :
              
               and
               so
               is
               it
               taken
               Lament
               .
               2.
               8.
               he
               made
               the
               rampart
               and
               the
               wall
               to
               lament
               .
               In
               the
               other
               part
               of
               this
               verse
               ,
               some
               read
               ,
               prosperitie
               ,
               or
               tranquillitie
               :
               the
               Septuagint
               interprete
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               abundance
               ,
               which
               the
               originall
               
                 Shalvah
                 ,
              
               
               will
               well
               beare
               ,
               and
               so
               it
               is
               vsed
               .
               Ezech.
               16.
               49.
               the
               aboundance
               of
               peace
               .
               The
               faithful
               then
               are
               here
               taught
               to
               pray
               that
               warre
               &
               trouble
               may
               cease
               ,
               that
               there
               neede
               no
               watching
               or
               warding
               vpon
               the
               walls
               :
               but
               that
               the
               citizens
               within
               the
               wals
               ,
               and
               euery
               man
               in
               his
               house
               may
               be
               quiet
               &
               at
               peace
               .
               It
               appeareth
               then
               ,
               that
               this
               also
               is
               not
               the
               least
               blessing
               ,
               when
               God
               sendeth
               peace
               vnto
               a
               nation
               ,
               and
               intermission
               of
               warre
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 As
                 the
                 Lord
                 promiseth
                 by
                 his
                 prophet
                 :
              
               My
               people
               shall
               dwell
               in
               tabernacles
               of
               peace
               ,
               and
               in
               sure
               dwellings
               ,
               and
               in
               safe
               resting
               places
               ,
               
                 Isay
                 ,
              
               32.
               18.
               
               They
               shall
               breake
               their
               swords
               into
               mattocks
               ,
               and
               their
               speares
               into
               sythes
               ,
               nation
               shall
               not
               lift
               vp
               sword
               against
               nation
               ,
               neither
               shall
               they
               learne
               to
               fight
               any
               more
               ,
               
                 Isay.
              
               2.
               4.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               God
               blessed
               the
               raigne
               of
               Dauid
               :
               
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 gaue
                 him
                 rest
                 ,
                 round
                 about
                 from
                 all
                 his
                 enemies
                 ,
              
               2.
               
               Sam.
               7.
               1.
               
               He
               also
               prophecieth
               of
               his
               sonne
               Salomon
               :
               
                 that
                 aboundance
                 of
                 peace
                 should
                 be
                 as
                 long
                 as
                 the
                 moone
                 endureth
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               72.
               7.
               who
               had
               his
               name
               Salomon
               therefore
               giuen
               him
               from
               the
               Lord
               ,
               because
               he
               should
               haue
               rest
               frō
               all
               his
               enemies
               round
               about
               ,
               1.
               
               Chro.
               22.
               9.
               
               And
               contrariwise
               ,
               as
               God
               blesseth
               righteous
               kings
               with
               peace
               ,
               so
               he
               iudgeth
               wicked
               
               gouernours
               and
               people
               with
               warres
               and
               troubles
               :
               as
               the
               Prophet
               threatneth
               Israel
               .
               
                 Manasseh
                 Ephraim
                 ,
                 &
                 Ephraim
                 Manasseh
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 both
                 shall
                 be
                 against
                 Iudah
                 ,
              
               Isay
               ,
               9.
               20.
               
               Thus
               was
               it
               in
               the
               daies
               of
               Asa
               in
               the
               world
               ,
               
                 There
                 was
                 no
                 peace
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 that
                 did
                 goe
                 out
                 and
                 in
                 ,
                 but
                 great
                 troubles
                 were
                 to
                 all
                 the
                 inhabitants
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 ;
                 for
                 nation
                 was
                 destroyed
                 of
                 nation
                 ,
                 and
                 cittie
                 of
                 cittie
                 ,
                 for
                 God
                 troubled
                 them
                 with
                 all
                 aduersitie
                 .
              
               2.
               
               Chro.
               15.
               5
               ,
               6.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               prophet
               ,
               speaking
               of
               the
               troubles
               that
               should
               befall
               the
               people
               for
               their
               sinnes
               ,
               saith
               ,
               
                 They
                 should
                 be
                 as
                 meate
                 to
                 the
                 fire
                 ,
              
               Isay.
               9.
               19.
               
               Warre
               is
               as
               the
               fire
               ,
               and
               it
               feedeth
               vpon
               and
               destroyeth
               the
               people
               ,
               as
               the
               fire
               consumeth
               strawe
               or
               wood
               :
               or
               like
               as
               an
               hungrie
               man
               snatcheth
               at
               the
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               left
               ,
               and
               is
               not
               satisfied
               ,
               Isay
               ,
               9.
               20.
               such
               is
               the
               vnsatiable
               and
               hungrie
               desire
               of
               warre
               ,
               there
               is
               no
               measure
               of
               satietie
               of
               blood
               .
               But
               like
               vnto
               a
               raging
               storme
               ,
               that
               falleth
               vpon
               the
               wood
               and
               forrest
               ,
               Isay
               ,
               32.
               19.
               which
               commeth
               with
               great
               violence
               &
               terrible
               voice
               ,
               such
               is
               the
               tumult
               and
               violence
               of
               battell
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Peace
               therefore
               and
               ceasing
               from
               warre
               is
               the
               fruite
               and
               effect
               of
               trueth
               and
               iustice
               :
               
               as
               the
               prophet
               saith
               for
               the
               first
               ▪
               
                 I
                 
                 will
                 reueale
                 vnto
                 them
                 the
                 aboundance
                 of
                 peace
                 and
                 truth
                 ,
              
               Ier.
               33.
               6.
               and
               another
               prophet
               also
               testifieth
               for
               the
               second
               :
               
                 the
                 work
                 of
                 iustice
                 shall
                 be
                 peace
                 ,
              
               Isa.
               32.
               17.
               
               Therefore
               vnder
               the
               kingdome
               of
               Christ
               ,
               peace
               and
               safetie
               is
               promised
               ;
               because
               his
               kingdome
               ,
               is
               a
               kingdome
               of
               righteousnes
               :
               
                 I
                 will
                 raise
                 vnto
                 Dauid
                 a
                 righteous
                 braunch
                 ,
                 &c.
                 in
                 his
                 daies
                 Iudah
                 shall
                 be
                 saued
                 ,
                 and
                 Israel
                 shall
                 dwell
                 safely
                 ,
              
               Ierem.
               23.
               6.
               which
               though
               it
               be
               specially
               referred
               to
               the
               spirituall
               peace
               ,
               yet
               we
               doe
               see
               also
               that
               outward
               tranquillitie
               doth
               waite
               vpon
               the
               Gospel
               as
               an
               handmaid
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               then
               we
               are
               taught
               to
               acknowledge
               another
               singular
               fauour
               of
               God
               toward
               vs
               :
               
               that
               hath
               heard
               the
               praiers
               of
               his
               seruants
               ,
               and
               graunted
               peace
               vnto
               his
               Church
               .
               Domesticall
               peace
               and
               quietnes
               this
               land
               (
               thanks
               be
               to
               God
               )
               hath
               enioyed
               more
               then
               these
               40.
               yeares
               vnder
               the
               conduct
               of
               our
               worthy
               Deborah
               our
               late
               Soueraigne
               Q.
               Elizabeth
               .
               But
               much
               forren
               busines
               hath
               happened
               in
               this
               time
               in
               Ireland
               ,
               the
               low
               countries
               ,
               and
               in
               other
               places
               :
               much
               piracie
               hath
               beene
               committed
               vpon
               the
               sea
               ,
               diuers
               assaults
               and
               inuasions
               haue
               beene
               intended
               against
               this
               realme
               ,
               and
               one
               furiously
               attempted
               by
               the
               Spanyards
               ,
               
               
                 ann
                 .
              
               88.
               
               But
               now
               we
               trust
               that
               the
               English
               nation
               may
               haue
               peace
               abroad
               ,
               and
               there
               is
               great
               hope
               ,
               that
               our
               peaceable
               Salomon
               and
               princely
               Ecclesiastes
               ,
               will
               bring
               vnto
               this
               land
               a
               generall
               peace
               and
               quietnes
               both
               at
               home
               and
               abroad
               :
               that
               men
               may
               trauaile
               safely
               at
               home
               ,
               merchants
               traffique
               without
               daunger
               abroad
               ,
               that
               artificers
               may
               still
               sing
               in
               their
               shops
               ,
               husbandmen
               chearefully
               follow
               the
               plow
               ,
               students
               applie
               their
               bookes
               :
               all
               which
               things
               by
               warre
               are
               interrupted
               .
               For
               as
               Hierome
               saith
               ,
               
                 Si
                 iuxta
                 inclyt●m
                 oratorem
                 silent
                 inter
                 arma
                 leges
                 ,
                 multo
                 magis
                 studia
                 scripturarum
                 ▪
                 quae
                 librorum
                 multitudine
                 ,
                 silentio
                 &
                 otio
                 indig●nt
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 If
                 ▪
                 as
                 the
                 famous
                 Orator
                 saith
                 ,
                 lawes
                 are
                 silent
                 amidst
                 warres
                 ,
                 how
                 much
                 more
                 the
                 studie
                 of
                 scriptures
                 ,
                 which
                 require
                 multitude
                 of
                 bookes
                 ,
                 silence
                 and
                 rest
                 ?
              
               Further
               ,
               we
               see
               the
               contrarie
               disposition
               of
               the
               righteous
               seede
               ,
               and
               the
               wicked
               race
               ▪
               for
               they
               are
               not
               so
               much
               given
               vnto
               peace
               ,
               as
               these
               are
               to
               be
               contentio●s
               :
               as
               the
               prophet
               Dauid
               saith
               ,
               
                 I
                 seeke
                 peace
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 I
                 speake
                 vnto
                 them
                 thereof
                 ,
                 they
                 bende
                 themselues
                 to
                 warre
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               ●
               20.
               7.
               
               Like
               as
               it
               is
               said
               of
               Ismael
               ,
               
                 that
                 his
                 hand
                 was
                 against
                 euery
                 man
                 ,
                 and
                 euery
                 mans
                 hand
                 against
                 him
                 ,
              
               Gen.
               16.
               12.
               
               Such
               are
               nations
               with
               their
               gouernours
               ,
               
               that
               haue
               not
               the
               knowledge
               and
               true
               worship
               of
               God.
               It
               is
               easie
               to
               ges●e
               ,
               who
               are
               the
               Ismaelites
               of
               this
               age
               ,
               that
               are
               readie
               to
               offend
               all
               their
               neighbours
               both
               by
               sea
               and
               land
               ,
               thirsting
               after
               the
               monarchie
               of
               many
               nations
               ,
               and
               stretching
               out
               their
               line
               beyond
               their
               measure
               .
               These
               are
               the
               fruits
               of
               the
               Popish
               separation
               ,
               and
               such
               is
               the
               spirit
               of
               that
               bodie
               ,
               breathing
               out
               continually
               contention
               and
               warre
               .
               It
               is
               no
               rare
               thing
               for
               one
               countrey
               ,
               citie
               ,
               or
               state
               ,
               professing
               poperie
               to
               prouoke
               another
               :
               witnesse
               hereof
               the
               great
               contentions
               betweene
               the
               Guelphs
               in
               Italie
               taking
               part
               with
               the
               Popes
               ,
               and
               the
               Gibelines
               of
               the
               Emperours
               part
               :
               
               the
               strifes
               &
               warres
               mooued
               among
               the
               Popes
               themselues
               ,
               that
               diuers
               times
               warred
               one
               vpon
               another
               for
               the
               triple
               crowne
               ;
               
               as
               Alexander
               the
               3.
               against
               the
               Antipopes
               Octavian
               ,
               
               Guido
               ,
               Ioannes
               :
               the
               Vrbanists
               against
               the
               Clementines
               :
               
               and
               twentie
               times
               beside
               was
               that
               Sea
               deuided
               .
               Such
               were
               the
               wars
               betweene
               the
               states
               of
               Italie
               ;
               as
               the
               Romanes
               and
               Tuscanes
               ,
               ann
               .
               1166.
               betweene
               Millane
               ,
               Florence
               ,
               and
               Mantua
               ,
               an
               .
               1398.
               betweene
               the
               Venetians
               and
               the
               citie
               of
               Pavie
               ,
               
               and
               Verone
               ,
               ann
               .
               1405.
               
               Thus
               France
               and
               Spaine
               haue
               beene
               at
               variāce
               ,
               
               England
               and
               Scotland
               ,
               
               til
               the
               religion
               and
               faith
               of
               the
               Gospel
               vnited
               them
               .
               Which
               vnitie
               we
               trust
               nowe
               shall
               for
               euer
               hold
               ,
               beeing
               knit
               together
               with
               three
               most
               sure
               bonds
               natural
               ,
               ciuil
               ,
               &
               religious
               :
               the
               first
               ,
               in
               that
               the
               same
               continent
               containeth
               them
               ;
               the
               second
               ,
               one
               kingdome
               and
               gouernment
               ruleth
               them
               :
               the
               third
               ▪
               one
               religion
               and
               worship
               of
               god
               instructeth
               them
               :
               and
               therefore
               ,
               as
               the
               preacher
               saith
               ,
               a
               threefold
               cord
               cannot
               easily
               be
               brokē
               ,
               Eccles.
               4.
               11.
               
               Long
               may
               this
               cord
               hold
               ,
               &
               long
               may
               his
               princely
               Maiestie
               continue
               among
               vs
               ,
               that
               hath
               twisted
               this
               cord
               :
               and
               God
               graunt
               that
               both
               prince
               and
               people
               may
               walke
               in
               his
               feare
               ,
               that
               as
               our
               Christian
               king
               is
               pious
               and
               faithfull
               toward
               God
               ,
               so
               we
               may
               be
               obedient
               to
               God
               and
               our
               king
               .
               And
               let
               vs
               not
               onely
               pray
               for
               peace
               but
               practise
               it
               ,
               not
               wish
               it
               onely
               ,
               but
               worke
               it
               :
               that
               we
               may
               desire
               so
               to
               please
               God
               ,
               that
               he
               may
               delight
               to
               dwell
               among
               vs
               :
               That
               according
               to
               the
               angels
               song
               ,
               
                 Glorie
                 be
                 to
                 God
                 on
                 high
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 earth
                 peace
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               Luk.
               2.
               14.
               
               We
               may
               in
               all
               things
               set
               forth
               the
               glorie
               of
               God
               that
               we
               may
               enioy
               peace
               :
               that
               God
               hauing
               his
               due
               ,
               we
               may
               receiue
               our
               desire
               :
               glorie
               beeing
               not
               giuen
               vnto
               God
               ,
               peace
               is
               denied
               to
               men
               :
               where
               God
               by
               
               our
               sinnes
               is
               prouoked
               ,
               there
               peace
               in
               earth
               is
               like
               to
               be
               interrupted
               .
               And
               therefore
               he
               saith
               well
               ,
               
                 Quanam
                 est
                 causa
                 tanti
                 furoris
                 ▪
                 non
                 alia
                 sane
                 ,
                 nisi
                 quia
                 displicet
                 mortalibus
                 angelica
                 illa
                 partitio
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 What
                 is
                 the
                 cause
                 of
                 so
                 great
                 rage
                 ?
                 none
                 other
                 but
                 this
                 ,
                 because
                 that
                 partition
                 of
                 the
                 angel
                 disliketh
                 men
                 whereby
                 glorie
                 is
                 giuen
                 vnto
                 God
                 ,
                 peace
                 vnto
                 men
                 :
                 Quonam
                 modo
                 stabit
                 pax
                 hominum
                 coram
                 deo
                 ,
              
               
               
                 si
                 deo
                 apud
                 homines
                 non
                 potest
                 tu●a
                 esse
                 sua
                 gloria
                 ?
                 Howe
                 shall
                 mans
                 peace
                 be
                 ratified
                 before
                 God
                 ,
                 when
                 Gods
                 glory
                 is
                 violated
                 with
                 men
                 ?
              
            
          
           
             
               The
               19.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               Vers.
               8.
               
               
                 For
                 my
                 brethren
                 and
                 neighbours
                 sake
                 I
                 will
                 wish
                 thee
                 now
                 prosperitie
                 .
                 ]
              
               First
               the
               prophet
               sheweth
               ,
               that
               the
               loue
               of
               his
               countrie
               ,
               and
               affection
               to
               his
               brethren
               mooued
               him
               to
               wish
               well
               vnto
               them
               ,
               and
               to
               desire
               the
               peace
               thereof
               :
               So
               then
               religion
               taketh
               not
               away
               naturall
               affection
               to
               countrie
               ,
               friends
               ,
               and
               parents
               ,
               but
               it
               rather
               maintaineth
               and
               vpholdeth
               it
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               Apostle
               reprooueth
               the
               Gentiles
               ,
               because
               they
               were
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               
                 Men
                 void
                 of
                 naturall
                 affection
                 ,
              
               Rom.
               1.
               31.
               
               And
               the
               Prophet
               saith
               ,
               
                 Hide
                 not
                 thy selfe
                 from
                 thine
                 
                 owne
                 flesh
                 :
              
               Isay
               ,
               58.
               6.
               
               He
               which
               withdraweth
               his
               affection
               from
               his
               neighbours
               and
               countrimen
               ,
               is
               as
               though
               he
               had
               no
               pittie
               or
               compassion
               vpon
               his
               owne
               flesh
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               nature
               wrought
               in
               faithfull
               Abraham
               ,
               
               when
               he
               armed
               himselfe
               and
               all
               his
               familie
               ,
               and
               rescued
               and
               recouered
               Lot
               his
               brothers
               sonne
               ,
               which
               was
               taken
               captiue
               ,
               Gen.
               14.
               
               S.
               Pauls
               affection
               was
               very
               ardent
               toward
               his
               countrey
               ,
               when
               he
               wished
               himselfe
               to
               be
               separated
               from
               Christ
               ,
               for
               his
               brethrēs
               sake
               ,
               which
               were
               his
               kinsmen
               according
               to
               the
               flesh
               .
               But
               cursed
               is
               the
               memorie
               of
               cruell
               and
               vnnaturall
               Abimelech
               ,
               who
               destroied
               his
               owne
               citie
               of
               Sichem
               ,
               and
               sowed
               it
               with
               salt
               to
               make
               it
               vnfruitfull
               and
               desolate
               ,
               and
               slue
               the
               people
               ,
               whome
               before
               he
               saide
               were
               his
               bone
               and
               his
               flesh
               .
               Iud.
               9.
               2.
               45.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Like
               as
               the
               doue
               returned
               to
               the
               Arke
               ,
               from
               whence
               she
               came
               forth
               ,
               Gen.
               8.
               as
               the
               oxe
               and
               asse
               know
               their
               masters
               cribbe
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               vsed
               to
               be
               fed
               ,
               Isa.
               1.
               3.
               and
               loue
               that
               place
               before
               any
               other
               :
               as
               the
               riuers
               goe
               vnto
               the
               sea
               from
               whence
               they
               came
               ,
               Eccles.
               1.
               7.
               so
               should
               our
               loue
               and
               affection
               be
               vnto
               that
               place
               ,
               which
               hath
               bredde
               vs
               ,
               and
               where
               we
               had
               our
               beeing
               .
               The
               lyons
               doe
               couch
               in
               their
               
               dennes
               ,
               
               where
               they
               are
               accustomed
               ,
               and
               the
               birds
               will
               hardly
               forsake
               the
               place
               ,
               where
               they
               were
               hatched
               :
               and
               nature
               draweth
               affection
               to
               our
               countrie
               ,
               which
               first
               gaue
               vs
               breath
               and
               life
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               Nehemiah
               giueth
               this
               reason
               of
               his
               affection
               to
               Ierusalem
               ,
               because
               there
               was
               
                 the
                 cittie
                 and
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 the
                 sepulchers
                 of
                 his
                 fathers
                 ,
              
               Nehem.
               2.
               3.
               
               Therefore
               a
               man
               can
               not
               be
               forgetfull
               of
               his
               countrie
               ,
               vnlesse
               he
               will
               shewe
               himselfe
               vnnaturall
               and
               vnthankefull
               to
               his
               parents
               and
               progenitors
               ,
               which
               there
               remained
               while
               they
               liued
               ,
               &
               and
               there
               lie
               buried
               nowe
               they
               are
               dead
               .
               This
               made
               Iacob
               charge
               his
               children
               ,
               to
               burie
               him
               in
               the
               caue
               with
               his
               fathers
               :
               
                 There
                 they
                 buried
                 Abraham
                 and
                 Sara
                 his
                 wife
                 ,
                 there
                 they
                 buried
                 Isaack
                 and
                 Rebecca
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 I
                 buried
                 Lea
                 ,
              
               Gen.
               49.
               29.
               31.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               By
               this
               doctrine
               then
               we
               condemn
               vnnaturall
               and
               mostrous
               practises
               of
               all
               traiterous
               papists
               ,
               that
               haue
               heretofore
               most
               cruelly
               practised
               against
               their
               prince
               and
               countrey
               :
               Such
               were
               Morton
               ,
               to
               the
               Popes
               bellowes
               to
               kindle
               the
               rebellion
               in
               the
               North
               ,
               Saunders
               in
               Ireland
               :
               such
               were
               Ballard
               ,
               Babington
               ,
               Arden
               ,
               Sommerfield
               ,
               Parrie
               ,
               Campion
               ,
               Sherwin
               ,
               Yorke
               ,
               Standley
               ,
               Squire
               ,
               with
               the
               rest
               of
               that
               popish
               
               broad
               ,
               who
               by
               their
               treacherous
               attempts
               against
               the
               life
               of
               their
               Soueraigne
               ,
               intended
               nothing
               els
               but
               the
               hauocke
               &
               spoile
               of
               their
               countrie
               ;
               and
               to
               make
               it
               a
               pray
               to
               the
               enemies
               teeth
               .
               Herein
               they
               professing
               Christianitie
               ,
               were
               much
               inferiour
               to
               the
               heathen
               ,
               
               who
               preferred
               the
               safetie
               of
               their
               countrie
               before
               their
               owne
               liues
               ,
               so
               farre
               were
               they
               from
               attempting
               any
               thing
               preiudiciall
               to
               the
               state
               and
               welfare
               thereof
               :
               So
               forraine
               stories
               make
               honourable
               mētion
               of
               Codrus
               king
               of
               Athens
               ,
               
               who
               warring
               vpon
               the
               Thracians
               ,
               which
               had
               promise
               of
               victorie
               by
               an
               Oracle
               ,
               so
               that
               Codrus
               were
               killed
               ,
               rushed
               into
               the
               middest
               of
               his
               enemies
               ,
               and
               by
               his
               death
               obtained
               the
               victorie
               to
               the
               Athenians
               .
               The
               like
               did
               the
               Decij
               among
               the
               Romans
               ,
               the
               father
               in
               the
               warres
               against
               the
               Albanes
               ,
               the
               sonne
               against
               the
               French
               ,
               vowed
               thēselues
               to
               die
               for
               the
               safetie
               of
               their
               countrey
               .
               Therefore
               it
               may
               be
               a
               shame
               for
               such
               as
               would
               be
               counted
               Christians
               to
               seeke
               the
               spoile
               of
               their
               countrie
               ,
               for
               the
               preseruation
               whereof
               ;
               they
               ought
               to
               spend
               their
               life
               and
               blood
               .
               Iudge
               then
               ,
               what
               manner
               of
               religion
               this
               is
               ,
               that
               nourisheth
               such
               disciples
               ,
               and
               bringeth
               forth
               such
               fruits
               .
            
             
               Beside
               there
               are
               others
               ,
               which
               offend
               against
               
               this
               rule
               ,
               who
               ,
               though
               they
               shewe
               not
               themselues
               as
               enemies
               to
               their
               countrey
               ,
               as
               the
               former
               ,
               in
               seeking
               the
               hurt
               thereof
               ,
               yet
               they
               faile
               in
               their
               dutie
               toward
               their
               countrey
               ,
               because
               they
               procure
               not
               the
               good
               thereof
               :
               Such
               are
               they
               ,
               which
               seeke
               to
               inrich
               themselues
               ,
               though
               it
               be
               to
               the
               vndoing
               of
               a
               whole
               countrey
               ,
               as
               inclosers
               of
               commons
               ,
               engrossers
               of
               commodities
               to
               raise
               them
               to
               a
               higher
               price
               ,
               
               purchassers
               of
               
                 monopolies
              
               and
               priuiledged
               sales
               and
               aduantages
               :
               all
               which
               doe
               tend
               to
               the
               priuate
               gaine
               of
               a
               few
               ,
               but
               the
               hinderance
               of
               many
               ,
               and
               losse
               to
               the
               common-wealth
               :
               Such
               the
               wise
               man
               speaketh
               of
               :
               
                 He
                 that
                 withdraweth
                 corne
                 ,
                 the
                 people
                 shall
                 curse
                 him
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               Prou.
               11.
               26.
               which
               is
               true
               also
               of
               all
               other
               commodities
               ;
               that
               whosoeuer
               shall
               drawe
               any
               common
               profit
               from
               the
               people
               ,
               be
               it
               in
               corne
               ,
               merchandize
               ,
               commons
               ,
               or
               such
               like
               ,
               Gods
               curse
               and
               the
               peoples
               shall
               light
               vpon
               him
               .
               And
               of
               this
               sort
               ,
               I
               feare
               me
               ,
               there
               are
               many
               in
               the
               world
               ,
               that
               respect
               more
               their
               own
               ,
               then
               the
               common-wealth
               :
               nay
               looke
               but
               into
               the
               state
               of
               euery
               towne
               ,
               how
               few
               shall
               you
               finde
               ,
               that
               are
               deuoted
               to
               the
               good
               of
               the
               township
               ,
               but
               addicted
               wholly
               to
               themselues
               ?
               you
               shall
               see
               many
               ,
               that
               
               are
               readie
               to
               eate
               vp
               and
               deuoure
               their
               neighbours
               ,
               by
               vndermining
               and
               ouertaking
               them
               by
               hard
               and
               vncharitable
               bargaines
               :
               like
               to
               the
               raine
               
                 that
                 sweepeth
                 away
                 their
                 food
                 ,
              
               Prou.
               28.
               3.
               for
               such
               sweep
               away
               a
               poore
               mans
               crops
               and
               corne
               ,
               as
               if
               it
               should
               be
               lost
               by
               raging
               and
               vnseasonable
               weather
               :
               like
               as
               hastie
               raines
               doe
               wash
               and
               carrie
               away
               the
               tilth
               of
               the
               land
               ;
               so
               such
               cormorants
               ouerdripping
               their
               poore
               neighbours
               ,
               will
               not
               suffer
               them
               to
               thriue
               or
               grow
               by
               them
               .
               It
               is
               a
               great
               infamie
               to
               Christians
               ,
               that
               these
               times
               wil
               not
               affoard
               such
               good
               common-weale
               men
               ,
               as
               were
               many
               among
               the
               Pagans
               .
               It
               is
               written
               of
               Pompeius
               the
               great
               ,
               that
               while
               Rome
               suffered
               a
               great
               dearth
               ,
               he
               hauing
               prouided
               great
               store
               of
               corne
               abroad
               ,
               and
               shipped
               the
               same
               ,
               while
               the
               marriners
               were
               afraid
               to
               set
               forward
               because
               of
               the
               suddaine
               tempest
               ,
               he
               himselfe
               was
               the
               first
               that
               entered
               ,
               
               vsing
               these
               couragious
               wordes
               :
               
                 It
                 is
                 necessarie
                 for
                 vs
                 to
                 saile
                 ,
                 but
                 not
                 so
                 necessarie
                 to
                 liue
                 :
              
               he
               preferred
               the
               releife
               of
               many
               before
               the
               saftie
               of
               one
               .
            
             
               Lastly
               ,
               howe
               much
               are
               we
               bound
               to
               giue
               thankes
               vnto
               God
               ,
               
               who
               hath
               giuen
               vs
               a
               prince
               to
               gouerne
               vs
               ,
               who
               may
               and
               doeth
               say
               with
               the
               prophet
               here
               ,
               
                 for
                 my
                 
                 brethren
                 and
                 neighbours
                 sake
                 ,
                 I
                 will
                 wish
                 thee
                 prosperitie
                 .
              
               Whose
               Maiestie
               ,
               though
               in
               his
               regall
               authoritie
               our
               Soueraigne
               lord
               and
               King
               ,
               yet
               in
               respect
               of
               his
               consanguinitie
               our
               brother
               ,
               borne
               of
               English
               parentage
               ,
               and
               we
               his
               louing
               neighbours
               before
               ,
               in
               countrey
               ,
               language
               ,
               religion
               ,
               and
               now
               his
               dutifull
               subiects
               .
               Now
               England
               shall
               be
               to
               his
               Highnes
               as
               Scotland
               ,
               and
               Scotland
               as
               England
               .
               Such
               a
               prince
               ,
               as
               vnto
               whome
               I
               am
               perswaded
               the
               Church
               and
               Commonwealth
               are
               as
               deare
               ,
               as
               his
               life
               :
               who
               herein
               may
               be
               compared
               to
               Dauid
               ,
               who
               was
               readie
               (
               as
               Ambrose
               rehearseth
               )
               
                 Seipsum
                 pro
                 populo
                 offerre
                 morti
                 ,
              
               
               
                 cum
                 ferienti
                 angelo
                 occurrebat
                 ,
                 &c.
                 meritò
                 ergo
                 expetitus
                 est
                 ab
                 vniuersis
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 To
                 offer
                 himselfe
                 for
                 the
                 people
                 ,
                 meeting
                 the
                 Angel
                 in
                 the
                 way
                 that
                 stroke
                 the
                 people
                 ,
                 &c.
                 therefore
                 he
                 was
                 worthely
                 desired
                 of
                 all
                 .
              
               And
               as
               he
               againe
               saith
               ,
               
                 Charitas
                 nunquam
                 cadit
                 ,
                 ideo
                 Dauid
                 nunquā
                 recidit
                 ,
                 quia
                 charus
                 fuit
                 omnibus
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Loue
                 neuer
                 falleth
                 away
                 ,
                 therefore
                 Dauid
                 could
                 not
                 fall
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 beloued
                 of
                 and
                 deare
                 vnto
                 all
                 .
              
               So
               I
               trust
               our
               vertuous
               Dauid
               shall
               neuer
               fall
               ,
               beeing
               beloued
               of
               his
               people
               ,
               and
               much
               more
               deare
               vnto
               God
               ,
               who
               graunt
               vnto
               his
               Maiestie
               an
               happie
               ,
               godly
               ,
               and
               peaceable
               raigne
               ouer
               vs.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               The
               20.
               meditation
               .
            
             
               v.
               9.
               
               
                 Because
                 of
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 our
                 God
                 ,
                 I
                 will
                 procure
                 thy
                 wealth
                 .
                 ]
              
               This
               beeing
               the
               greatest
               motiue
               that
               drew
               from
               Dauid
               this
               great
               affection
               ,
               is
               reserued
               for
               the
               last
               place
               :
               his
               naturall
               loue
               vnto
               Israel
               ,
               as
               his
               countrey
               and
               kinred
               was
               very
               great
               ,
               but
               his
               desire
               vnto
               it
               ,
               as
               Gods
               Church
               ,
               and
               because
               of
               the
               Lords
               presence
               amongst
               thē
               ,
               was
               much
               more
               :
               spirituall
               loue
               then
               is
               to
               be
               preferred
               before
               naturall
               ,
               but
               where
               there
               is
               a
               concurrence
               and
               connexion
               of
               both
               ,
               the
               flame
               is
               encreased
               .
               There
               can
               be
               then
               no
               greater
               bond
               then
               religion
               ,
               no
               greater
               loue
               ,
               then
               for
               Christs
               cause
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Therefore
               the
               prophet
               Dauid
               saith
               els
               where
               :
               
               
                 He
                 hath
                 exalted
                 the
                 borne
                 of
                 his
                 people
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 praise
                 for
                 all
                 his
                 Saints
                 ,
                 euen
                 for
                 the
                 children
                 of
                 Israel
                 ,
                 a
                 people
                 neare
                 vnto
                 him
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               148.
               14.
               
               The
               righteous
               doe
               reioyce
               and
               praise
               God
               ,
               when
               the
               Lord
               exalteth
               his
               Church
               ,
               and
               prospereth
               it
               ,
               and
               strengtheneth
               the
               horne
               thereof
               against
               their
               enemies
               .
               And
               this
               is
               set
               downe
               as
               a
               sure
               marke
               to
               know
               a
               faithfull
               man
               by
               :
               
                 He
                 honoureth
                 them
                 ,
                 that
                 feare
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
              
               Psa.
               15.
               4.
               
               According
               to
               this
               rule
               the
               Apostle
               saith
               ,
               
                 While
                 we
                 haue
                 time
                 let
                 vs
                 doe
                 good
                 to
                 all
                 men
                 ,
                 
                 but
                 specially
                 to
                 them
                 which
                 are
                 of
                 the
                 houshold
                 of
                 faith
                 ,
              
               Gal.
               6.
               10.
               
               That
               like
               as
               God
               is
               the
               Sauiour
               of
               all
               mē
               ,
               specially
               of
               those
               which
               beleeue
               ,
               1.
               
               Tim.
               4.
               10.
               so
               we
               should
               make
               the
               same
               difference
               preferring
               those
               in
               our
               loue
               ,
               which
               are
               most
               beloued
               of
               god
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Thus
               the
               prophet
               Dauid
               professeth
               his
               loue
               to
               the
               people
               of
               God
               :
               
                 Mine
                 eyes
                 shall
                 be
                 to
                 the
                 faithfull
                 of
                 the
                 land
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               101.
               6.
               yea
               he
               saith
               ,
               
                 that
                 all
                 his
                 delight
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 Saints
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 ,
              
               Psal.
               16.
               3.
               
               Such
               was
               his
               zeale
               to
               the
               house
               of
               God
               ,
               that
               he
               would
               choose
               rather
               to
               be
               a
               doore-keeper
               there
               ,
               then
               to
               dwell
               (
               or
               to
               raigne
               as
               king
               )
               among
               the
               wicked
               .
               Psal.
               84.
               10.
               
               Thus
               also
               the
               people
               of
               God
               doe
               testifie
               their
               affection
               to
               the
               Church
               ;
               
                 they
                 well
                 preferre
                 Ierusalem
                 before
                 their
                 chiefe
                 ioy
                 .
              
               Psal.
               137.
               6.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               For
               he
               that
               loueth
               God
               ,
               must
               needs
               also
               loue
               Gods
               house
               the
               place
               where
               he
               dwelleth
               :
               he
               cannot
               but
               loue
               Gods
               image
               ,
               which
               most
               of
               all
               appeareth
               in
               the
               faithful
               and
               righteous
               .
               For
               Christs
               cause
               therefore
               his
               Church
               is
               beloued
               .
               Whatsoeuer
               is
               done
               vnto
               the
               members
               therof
               ,
               he
               doth
               acknowledge
               it
               as
               done
               to
               himselfe
               ,
               Mat.
               ●5
               .
               45.
               
               A
               man
               cānot
               be
               the
               bridegroomes
               friend
               ,
               and
               hate
               the
               bride
               ,
               which
               is
               new
               Ierusalem
               ,
               
               the
               holy
               city
               and
               Church
               of
               god
               .
            
             
             
               4.
               
               The
               loue
               of
               Christ
               and
               his
               Church
               should
               be
               remembred
               more
               then
               wine
               ,
               Cant.
               1.
               3.
               that
               is
               ,
               to
               be
               preferred
               before
               all
               other
               pleasures
               of
               loue
               .
               The
               faithfull
               say
               ,
               
                 I
                 am
                 sicke
                 of
                 this
                 loue
                 ,
              
               Cant.
               2.
               5.
               
               This
               loue
               hath
               no
               measure
               ,
               it
               exceedeth
               all
               bounds
               :
               
                 this
                 loue
                 is
                 as
                 strong
                 as
                 death
                 ,
              
               Cant.
               8.
               6.
               nay
               it
               is
               stronger
               then
               death
               :
               for
               it
               remaineth
               after
               death
               ;
               loue
               neuer
               falleth
               away
               :
               
                 much
                 water
                 cannot
                 quench
                 this
                 loue
                 :
              
               affliction●
               cannot
               ouercome
               it
               :
               
                 thy
                 seruants
                 delight
                 in
                 the
                 stones
                 thereof
                 ,
                 and
                 haue
                 pitie
                 on
                 the
                 dust
                 thereof
                 ,
              
               namely
               of
               Sion
               .
               Psal.
               102.
               14.
               
               Euen
               Gods
               Church
               when
               it
               is
               in
               the
               greatest
               affliction
               is
               louely
               :
               though
               shee
               be
               blacke
               ,
               because
               the
               funne
               of
               affliction
               hath
               looked
               vpon
               her
               ,
               yet
               is
               shee
               comely
               :
               though
               for
               the
               one
               like
               the
               tents
               of
               Kedar
               ,
               which
               are
               mooueable
               and
               flitting
               ,
               as
               the
               Church
               is
               tossed
               too
               and
               fro
               with
               affliction
               ;
               yet
               for
               the
               other
               ,
               shee
               is
               beautifull
               and
               pretious
               as
               the
               curtaines
               of
               Salomon
               .
               Cant.
               1.
               4.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               First
               then
               vnto
               the
               naturall
               loue
               of
               our
               countrey
               ,
               this
               must
               be
               added
               as
               a
               more
               worthie
               affection
               ,
               that
               our
               hearts
               be
               towarde
               it
               ,
               because
               it
               is
               the
               Church
               of
               God
               :
               that
               euery
               man
               should
               procure
               ,
               as
               much
               as
               in
               him
               lieth
               ,
               not
               onely
               the
               temporall
               
               welfare
               therof
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               the
               common-wealth
               ,
               but
               to
               wish
               the
               spirituall
               health
               and
               growth
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               Gods
               house
               .
               As
               he
               is
               an
               enemie
               to
               his
               countrey
               ,
               which
               hindreth
               the
               externall
               state
               and
               condition
               ,
               so
               he
               is
               no
               friend
               to
               the
               Church
               ,
               that
               furthereth
               not
               the
               internall
               perfection
               .
               Ministers
               are
               to
               informe
               ,
               and
               Magistrates
               to
               reforme
               the
               Church
               .
               The
               one
               negligent
               to
               instruct
               ,
               the
               other
               remisse
               to
               correct
               ,
               are
               not
               well-wishers
               to
               Gods
               house
               .
               This
               then
               may
               be
               an
               admonition
               to
               all
               slouthfull
               and
               idle
               pastours
               ,
               that
               are
               slacke
               in
               the
               Lords
               busines
               ,
               
               and
               as
               euill
               and
               vnfaithfull
               stewards
               giue
               not
               meate
               in
               due
               season
               to
               their
               Lords
               seruants
               .
               Such
               are
               they
               ,
               which
               want
               abilitie
               and
               cannot
               teach
               ,
               or
               want
               will
               and
               are
               idle
               and
               doe
               it
               not
               ,
               or
               are
               couetous
               and
               heape
               many
               Churches
               and
               dignities
               ,
               and
               are
               carelesse
               to
               teach
               :
               feeding
               themselues
               rather
               then
               the
               people
               of
               God
               :
               how
               can
               these
               say
               ,
               
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 God
                 I
                 will
                 procure
                 thy
                 wealth
                 ?
              
               nay
               they
               esteeme
               not
               Gods
               house
               ,
               neither
               duly
               regard
               the
               price
               of
               soules
               :
               taking
               vpon
               them
               some
               that
               ,
               which
               they
               cannot
               at
               all
               discharge
               ,
               some
               more
               then
               they
               can
               compasse
               ,
               
               some
               that
               whereunto
               they
               haue
               no
               desire
               .
               The
               first
               are
               
                 dumb●
                 dogges
                 ,
              
               that
               can
               
               not
               barke
               ,
               the
               second
               
                 greedie
                 dogges
                 ,
              
               that
               can
               neuer
               haue
               enough
               ,
               the
               third
               
                 sleepie
                 dogges
                 ,
              
               that
               he
               and
               delight
               in
               sleeping
               ,
               as
               the
               prophet
               compareth
               the
               watchmen
               and
               shepheards
               of
               Israel
               .
               The
               first
               then
               should
               be
               supplied
               ,
               the
               second
               moderated
               ,
               the
               third
               awaked
               .
               All
               of
               them
               are
               conuinced
               to
               beare
               small
               loue
               to
               the
               Church
               of
               Christ.
               Our
               Sauiour
               saith
               to
               Peter
               ,
               
                 If
                 thou
                 louest
                 me
                 ,
                 feede
                 my
                 sheepe
                 :
              
               he
               therefore
               that
               carefully
               feedeth
               not
               the
               flocke
               of
               Christ
               ,
               is
               found
               to
               be
               cold
               in
               his
               loue
               to
               Christ.
               The
               Pharisies
               refused
               no
               paines
               ,
               but
               compassed
               sea
               and
               land
               to
               make
               one
               Proselyte
               of
               their
               religion
               ,
               Math.
               23.
               15.
               in
               like
               manner
               the
               Pharisaicall
               brood
               of
               popish
               Iudasites
               and
               Seminaries
               in
               these
               daies
               ,
               doe
               trauell
               by
               sea
               and
               land
               to
               seduce
               simple
               soules
               ,
               and
               peruert
               them
               to
               their
               superstition
               .
               Then
               what
               a
               shame
               is
               it
               ,
               that
               the
               Ministers
               of
               the
               Gospel
               should
               giue
               themselues
               to
               a
               drousie
               sleepe
               ,
               as
               though
               the
               spirit
               of
               slumber
               had
               ouertaken
               them
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               be
               as
               carefull
               to
               defend
               Christs
               sheepe
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               to
               offend
               them
               ,
               to
               reduce
               them
               vnto
               God
               ,
               whome
               they
               haue
               seduced
               ,
               and
               to
               keepe
               them
               in
               the
               way
               ,
               whome
               the
               other
               seeke
               to
               driue
               out
               of
               the
               way
               ?
            
             
             
               Further
               ,
               what
               a
               great
               treasure
               had
               Israel
               of
               Dauid
               ,
               that
               was
               thus
               affected
               to
               Gods
               house
               ,
               for
               whose
               sake
               he
               thus
               heartily
               praieth
               for
               peace
               ,
               and
               promiseth
               to
               procure
               it
               .
               I
               trust
               that
               God
               hath
               raised
               vp
               another
               Dauid
               to
               his
               Israel
               of
               England
               ,
               whose
               princely
               heart
               nothing
               can
               more
               surely
               knit
               vnto
               his
               kingdom
               ,
               then
               because
               Gods
               house
               is
               amongst
               vs.
               He
               commeth
               not
               to
               a
               nation
               of
               a
               diuerse
               religion
               in
               substance
               ,
               though
               differing
               in
               some
               ceremonies
               :
               (
               with
               or
               without
               the
               which
               religion
               neither
               standeth
               nor
               falleth
               .
               )
               Which
               diuersitie
               of
               religion
               betweene
               Prince
               and
               people
               ,
               hath
               at
               other
               times
               and
               otherwhere
               ,
               caused
               great
               trouble
               sometime
               to
               the
               Prince
               ,
               where
               the
               kingdome
               could
               not
               be
               receiued
               ,
               vnlesse
               the
               religion
               professed
               were
               admitted
               ,
               as
               of
               late
               in
               France
               ;
               sometime
               to
               the
               people
               ,
               when
               a
               religion
               is
               by
               force
               imposed
               ,
               which
               is
               of
               fewe
               desired
               ,
               as
               well
               appeared
               in
               the
               change
               of
               religion
               in
               England
               at
               Queene
               Maries
               entrāce
               .
               Now
               both
               these
               occasions
               of
               trouble
               and
               tumult
               are
               remooued
               :
               neither
               the
               king
               required
               to
               chaunge
               his
               profession
               ,
               nor
               the
               people
               enforced
               to
               leaue
               their
               religion
               :
               but
               as
               we
               wish
               vnto
               the
               one
               (
               which
               we
               doubt
               not
               of
               )
               princely
               constancie
               and
               
               perseuerance
               ,
               so
               to
               the
               other
               Christian
               loyaltie
               and
               obedience
               .
               God
               hath
               sent
               vs
               a
               Prince
               ,
               
               that
               loueth
               Gods
               Church
               ;
               that
               wisheth
               no
               longer
               to
               liue
               ,
               then
               he
               may
               be
               a
               protectour
               of
               the
               faith
               ;
               who
               counteth
               it
               one
               of
               his
               fairest
               stiles
               to
               be
               called
               a
               louing
               nourish
               father
               to
               his
               Church
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               43.
               one
               that
               frequenteth
               the
               exercises
               of
               religion
               ,
               fostereth
               the
               faithfull
               Ministers
               thereof
               ,
               affecteth
               all
               the
               true
               professours
               of
               it
               :
               who
               misliketh
               and
               condemneth
               enmitie
               in
               nobles
               ,
               prophanenes
               in
               Courtiers
               ,
               papall
               pride
               in
               Church
               gouernours
               ,
               negligence
               in
               Pastours
               ,
               loosenesse
               of
               life
               in
               Christians
               ,
               coldnes
               of
               religion
               in
               Protestants
               .
               How
               much
               are
               we
               bound
               vnto
               the
               Lord
               ,
               that
               hath
               raised
               vp
               such
               a
               prince
               ,
               vnder
               whome
               religion
               is
               like
               to
               prosper
               ,
               and
               Christs
               Church
               to
               flourish
               :
               who
               will
               heare
               the
               complaints
               of
               the
               poore
               ,
               and
               not
               despise
               the
               groanes
               of
               the
               heauie
               hearted
               ,
               nor
               deferre
               the
               desire
               of
               the
               godly
               :
               according
               to
               the
               petition
               of
               the
               Church
               vnder
               Dauid
               ,
               
                 Let
                 the
                 king
                 heare
                 vs
                 ,
                 when
                 we
                 call
                 :
              
               of
               whose
               princely
               loue
               and
               fauour
               euery
               honest
               and
               sincere
               heart
               may
               say
               ,
               as
               one
               saith
               :
               
               
                 in
                 cuius
                 charitatem
                 facise
                 me
                 totum
                 proijcio
                 ,
                 fatigatum
                 scandalis
                 saculi
                 ,
                 deū
                 quippe
                 illie
                 esse
                 sentio
                 ,
                 in
                 quem
                 me
                 s●curus
                 proijcio
                 ,
                 
                 &
                 in
                 quo
                 securus
                 requiesco
                 .
                 Vpon
                 whose
                 loue
                 I
                 doe
                 repose
                 my selfe
                 ,
                 beeing
                 wearied
                 with
                 the
                 off●nces
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 for
                 God
                 is
                 there
                 present
                 ,
                 vpon
                 whome
                 I
                 wholly
                 relie
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 him
                 securely
                 rest
                 .
              
               God
               giue
               vs
               grace
               ,
               that
               as
               Samuel
               saith
               ,
               
                 We
                 may
                 so
                 feare
                 the
                 Lord
                 and
                 serue
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 disobey
                 the
                 word
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 that
                 both
                 we
                 and
                 the
                 king
                 that
                 raigneth
                 ouer
                 vs
                 ,
                 may
                 follow
                 the
                 Lord
                 our
                 God
                 :
              
               that
               is
               ,
               he
               may
               remaine
               with
               vs
               for
               euer
               ,
               that
               God
               may
               conduct
               vs
               in
               this
               life
               in
               all
               happines
               and
               prosperitie
               ,
               and
               we
               and
               our
               king
               may
               follow
               him
               to
               euerlasting
               felicitie
               .
               
                 Amen
                 ▪
              
            
             
               FINIS
               .
            
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           Errata
           .
        
         
           Pag.
           3.
           l.
           9.
           for
           law
           ,
           read
           loue
           .
        
         
           p.
           5.
           l.
           5.
           for
           people
           ,
           read
           prophet
           .
        
         
           p.
           6.
           l.
           29.
           for
           Retraveling
           ,
           read
           Estraveling
        
         
           p.
           10.
           l.
           4.
           read
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
        
         
           p.
           10.
           l.
           18.
           for
           found
           ,
           read
           find
           .
        
         
           p.
           12.
           l.
           4.
           next
           this
           ,
           read
           neither
           .
        
         
           p.
           12.
           l.
           16.
           for
           Atamoth
           ,
           read
           Alamoth
           .
        
         
           p.
           16.
           l.
           11.
           for
           whole
           ,
           read
           while
           .
        
         
           p.
           20.
           l.
           16.
           for
           Gaxe
           ,
           read
           Gaye
           .
        
         
           p.
           29.
           l.
           2.
           for
           that
           there
           ,
           read
           there
           .
        
         
           p.
           31.
           l.
           26.
           read
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
        
         
           p.
           37.
           l.
           27.
           for
           Revatane
           ,
           read
           E●vatane
           .
        
         
           p.
           61.
           l.
           2.
           for
           offring
           ,
           read
           offence
           .
        
         
           p.
           64.
           l.
           4.
           for
           imitated
           ,
           read
           initiated
           .
        
         
           p.
           72.
           l.
           18.
           for
           with
           the
           ,
           read
           of
           the.
           
        
         
           p.
           78.
           l.
           26.
           for
           reports
           ,
           read
           reporters
           .
        
         
           p.
           88.
           l.
           1.
           read
           ,
           to
           remember
           ,
           once
           .
        
         
           p.
           92.
           read
           ,
           in
           the
           preface
           to
           the
           answer
           of
           the
           Apologicall
           epistle
           :
           these
           wordes
           must
           be
           placed
           in
           the
           margin
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           not
           in
           the
           copie
           ,
           which
           by
           great
           ouersight
           were
           set
           in
           the
           booke
           .
        
         
           p.
           109.
           for
           ,
           to
           the
           ,
           read
           the.
           
        
         
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A15398-e210
           
             Zachar.
             4.
             10.
             
          
           
             Zachar.
             4.
             7.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             45.
             1.
             
          
           
             Iustini●n
             ▪
             cod
             .
             lib.
             3.
             tit
             .
             4.
             leg
             ▪
             28.
             
          
           
             Cant.
             1.
             3.
             
          
           
             Isa.
             22.
             21.
             
          
           
             Isa.
             58.
             
             ●1
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Sam.
             1.
             
          
           
             Luk.
             2.
             36.
             
          
           
             Fo●
             p.
             507.
             col
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             Fo●●
             .
             10
             ▪
             ●
             .
          
           
             Prefac●
             to
             the
             Reader
             in
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Sam.
             14.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Sam.
             20.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             King.
             4.
             
          
           
             Prov.
             31.
             29.
             
          
           
             vers
             .
             ●●
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A15398-e680
           
             The
             particular
             blessings
             in
             Israel
             vnder
             Dauid
             ,
             &
             in
             England
             like
             to
             be
             vnder
             his
             Maiestie
             .
          
           
             The
             vniting
             of
             two
             kingdomes
             .
          
           
             Continuance
             o●
             religion
             .
          
           
             A
             iudicial
             and
             learned
             prince
             .
          
           
             Epist.
             25.
             ad
             Gratian.
             
          
           
             Free
             accesse
             to
             Gods
             house
             .
          
           
             Mutuall
             confe●●●e
             .
          
           
             The
             example
             of
             the
             Prince
             .
          
           
             Religion
             s●●led
             .
          
           
             Meditat.
             vpon
             the
             20.
             of
             the
             Reuelat
             .
          
           
             p.
             3.
             art
             .
             8.
             
          
           
             Encrease
             of
             wealth
             .
          
           
             The
             generall
             cōsent
             and
             desire
             of
             all
             .
          
           
             Vniformitie
             in
             religion
             .
          
           
             Religion
             sincere
             without
             mixture
             .
          
           
             Meditat
             vpon
             ●5
             .
             of
             the
             1.
             of
             Chron
             in
             the
             applica●
             .
          
           
             Meditat
             vpon
             20.
             of
             the
             reuelat
             .
             3.
             p.
             art
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             Reformation
             of
             things
             amisse
             .
             Preface
             to
             the
             Reader
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Praising
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             12●
             .
             v.
             2.
             
          
           
             Seates
             of
             iustice
             ,
             ●4
             .
             benefit
             .
          
           
             p.
             9●
             .
             92.
             
          
           
             A
             prince
             no
             strāger
             ,
             15.
             
             Benefit
             .
          
           
             pag.
             55.
             
          
           
             Consent
             in
             doctrine
             .
          
           
             Pag.
             10.
             l.
             1.
             
          
           
             Externall
             peace
             .
          
           
             p.
             56.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             p.
             55.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             18.
             benefit
             ,
             domesticall
             peace
             and
             plentie
             .
          
           
             A
             louing
             prince
             .
          
           
             p.
             25.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Loue
             of
             Gods
             Church
             .
          
           
             Meditat.
             in
             15.
             1.
             
             Chro.
             part
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             p.
             43.
             
          
           
             p.
             20.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             40.
             5.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             p
             89.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             Medita
             in
             Chro.
             applicat
             .
          
           
             The
             prince
             keeper
             of
             both
             tables
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             6.
             20.
             
          
           
             Ambrose
             epist.
             2●
             ▪
             
          
           
             Euery
             mans
             duty
             prescribed
             in
             the
             kings
             booke
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Meditat.
             in
             20.
             
             Reuelat
             3.
             par
             .
             ●●rt
             .
             7.
             
          
           
             Eccles.
             12.
             9.
             
          
           
             The
             comfort
             &
             contentment
             of
             all
             sorts
             in
             his
             Maiesties
             godly
             resolution
             .
          
           
             Lib.
             1.
             de
             Virgini
             .
          
           
             Prefation
             .
             ad
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A15398-e2340
           
             Thanksgiuing
             the
             incense
             of
             Christians
             .
          
           
             The
             vniting
             of
             these
             two
             kingdomes
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Benefit
             .
          
           
             Lanquet
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             Benefit
             .
          
           
             Continuance
             of
             religion
             .
          
           
             Psal.
             133.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             Benefit
             ,
             when
             God
             sendeth
             a
             learned
             and
             ver●uous
             prince
             .
          
           
             Thus
             seeme
             the
             Septuagint
             to
             thinke
             ,
             translating
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             degrees
             ,
             or
             ascending
             places
             .
          
           
             Why
             they
             are
             called
             psalmes
             of
             degrees
             .
          
           
             The
             scripture●
             whereunto
             profitable
             .
          
           
             How
             one
             scripture
             is
             said
             to
             be
             more
             excellent
             then
             another
             .
          
           
             August
             .
             epist.
             3.
             ad
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             The
             particular
             application
             of
             Scripture
             .
          
           
             De
             Ecclesiast
             .
             dogmatio
             .
             c.
             56.
             
          
           
             The
             ioy
             of
             christian
             assembli●●
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Benefit
             ,
             fre●
             accesie
             to
             God●
             house
             .
          
           
             Euseb.
             l.
             8.
             c.
             6.
             
          
           
             Fox
             p.
             952.
             col
             .
             ●
             .
          
           
             Hiero
             ad
             Gerontia●
             .
          
           
             in
             Psal.
             66.
             
          
           
             Serm.
             14.
             in
             Cantic
             .
          
           
             〈◊〉
             Psal.
             49.
             
          
           
             Fox
             p.
             818.
             anno
             1511.
             
          
           
             Fox
             p.
             897.
             
          
           
             Fox
             p.
             904.
             
          
           
             The
             5.
             benefit
             ,
             godly
             conferēc●
             
          
           
             Epist.
             70.
             
          
           
             Holines
             not
             〈◊〉
             be
             ascribed
             to
             the
             place
             it
             s●lfe
             ▪
             
          
           
             De
             d●dicat
             .
             eccles
             .
             serm
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             Houses
             of
             praier
             not
             to
             be
             profaned
             ▪
             
          
           
             Arelatens
             .
             sub
             Carol.
             c.
             22.
             
          
           
             Laodican
             .
             28.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             The
             6.
             benefit
             ,
             the
             example
             of
             a
             godly
             king
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Sam.
             5.
             v.
             1.
             8.
             10.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Sam.
             6.
             14.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Sam
             7.
             1.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Sam.
             6
             ▪
             10.
             and
             12.
             
          
           
             The
             fi●th
             of
             Ch●ist
             not
             flitting
             or
             changeable
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             King.
             19.
             
          
           
             The
             7.
             benefit
             the
             setling
             of
             religion
             .
          
           
             Lib
             1.
             de
             spirit
             .
             cap.
             2●
             .
          
           
             Ruine
             of
             cities
             for
             sinne
             .
          
           
             Epist.
             91.
             
          
           
             Of
             the
             wars
             for
             recouering
             the
             holy
             land
             so
             superstitiously
             called
             .
          
           
             Deterr
             .
             promis●
             .
          
           
             Ad
             Paulin.
             
          
           
             Rom●
             neuer
             had
             such
             promises
             as
             Hierusalem
             .
          
           
             Hier.
             ad
             Eustach
             .
          
           
             Ad
             Paulinum
             .
          
           
             Epist.
             92.
             
          
           
             Cambden
             de
             comit
             .
             He●tford
             .
          
           
             ad
             Gerontiam
             .
          
           
             Hieron
             ibid.
             
          
           
             Cant.
             8.
             9.
             
          
           
             The
             8.
             benefit
             ,
             enlarging
             of
             citties
             &
             buildings
             .
          
           
             Calamities
             vpon
             citties
             by
             winds
             and
             earthquakes
             Socrat.
             l.
             1.
             7.
             
          
           
             Zozomen
             ,
             lib.
             ●
             .
             cap.
             15.
             
          
           
             Euagr.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             1●
             .
          
           
             Senec.
             epist.
             91.
             
          
           
             Stowe
             .
          
           
             ●●●esto
             be
             obserued
             in
             building
             of
             houses
             .
          
           
             The
             danger
             of
             discord
             .
          
           
             The
             9.
             benefit
             the
             generall
             consent
             and
             desire
             of
             all
             in
             receiuing
             his
             Maiestie
             .
          
           
             Fox
             .
             p.
             101.
             p.
             135.
             
          
           
             Fox
             .
             p.
             3●5
             .
          
           
             Stowe
             .
          
           
             Lanquet
             .
             The
             10.
             benefit
             ,
             the
             wonderfull
             conioyning
             of
             both
             kingdomes
             .
          
           
             The
             11.
             benefit
             ,
             sinceritie
             in
             religion
             .
          
           
             An
             admonitio●
             to
             recusants
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Sam.
             4
             ▪
             4.
             
          
           
             Aduise
             giuen
             to
             schismatikes
             .
          
           
             Epist.
             82.
             
          
           
             The
             testimonie
             and
             cognizance
             of
             the
             old
             church
             of
             Israel
             .
          
           
             Rom.
             9.
             4.
             
          
           
             The
             word
             and
             sacraments
             essentiall
             notes
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             discipline
             o●
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             commination
             .
          
           
             The
             12.
             benefit
             ,
             reformation
             of
             things
             amisse
             .
          
           
             In
             Psal.
             98.
             in
             fine
             
          
           
             Churches
             appointed
             for
             praier
             .
          
           
             B●llar
             lib.
             ●●
             .
             de
             ●uk
             .
             sanct
             .
             c.
             4.
             
          
           
             Churches
             not
             ordained
             n●w
             for
             sacrifice
             .
          
           
             Abuses
             in
             popish
             seruice
             .
          
           
             Decr.
             par
             .
             1.
             dist
             .
             42.
             c.
             7.
             
          
           
             Synod
             .
             Mog●●
             .
             c.
             40.
             
          
           
             The
             13.
             benefit
             ,
             publike
             and
             priuate
             entercourse
             of
             religion
             .
          
           
             Lib.
             confess
             .
             10.
             c.
             33.
             
          
           
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             No
             man
             must
             come
             emptie
             into
             Gods
             house
             .
          
           
             Augustin
             .
             in
             Psal.
             65.
             
          
           
             The
             14.
             benefit
             ,
             ●●●●tion
             of
             iustice
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Repli●
             .
             fol.
             52.
             pag.
             1.
             
          
           
             Manifestat
             .
             fol.
             52.
             pag.
             1.
             
          
           
             Manifestat
             .
             fol.
             98.
             pag.
             1.
             
          
           
             Deliuerance
             frō
             forraine
             dangers
             .
          
           
             in
             Psal.
             85.
             
          
           
             The
             Princes
             power
             in
             causes
             Ecclesiasticall
             .
          
           
             The
             negligence
             and
             slouthfulnes
             of
             priests
             in
             the
             returne
             from
             captiuitie
             .
          
           
             The
             15.
             benefit
             ,
             a
             prince
             no
             stranger
             ,
             or
             forrainer
             .
          
           
             Ambr.
             lib.
             2.
             offic
             .
             cap.
             7.
             
          
           
             Against
             selfe-loue
             in
             praier
             .
             Selfe-loue
             .
          
           
             New
             doctrine
             a
             disturbing
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             Strange
             and
             vnsound
             positions
             maintained
             by
             some
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             England
             .
          
           
             The
             16.
             benefit
             ,
             consent
             of
             doctrine
             .
          
           
             Ambrose
             prolog
             .
             de
             fid
             .
             orthodox
             .
          
           
             The
             vnhappie
             ende
             of
             the
             haters
             of
             Christs
             Church
             .
          
           
             The
             17.
             benefit
             ,
             prosperitie
             .
          
           
             The
             desire
             and
             loue
             of
             vertue
             a
             good
             steppe
             to
             obtaine
             it
             .
          
           
             Homil.
             15.
             
          
           
             Ceasing
             of
             wa●●
             .
          
           
             Iustice
             and
             truth
             the
             causes
             of
             p●ace
             .
          
           
             The
             18
             benefit
             ,
             externall
             peace
             .
          
           
             ann
             .
             132●
             .
          
           
             ann
             .
             1168.
             
          
           
             Lanquet
             .
          
           
             ann
             .
             1383.
             
          
           
             Lanquet
             .
          
           
             Contentions
             vs●all
             betweene
             nations
             professing
             poperie
             .
          
           
             Bernard
             .
             epist.
             1●7
             .
          
           
             Religion
             taketh
             ●ot
             away
             natural
             affection
             .
          
           
             Loue
             to
             our
             co●trey
             naturall
             .
          
           
             Heathen
             louers
             of
             their
             countrey
             
          
           
             Plutarch
             .
             Fa●all
             .
             ●8
             .
          
           
             Against
             enclosures
             and
             monopolies
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             The
             ●9
             ▪
             benefit
             a
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             Lib.
             2.
             de
             offic
             .
             c.
             7.
             
          
           
             Ioy
             for
             the
             welf●re
             of
             Christs
             Church
             .
          
           
             Revel
             .
             21.
             2.
             
          
           
             Ministers
             who
             carelesse
             of
             Christs
             church
             .
          
           
             Who
             be
             the
             dumbe
             ,
             g●e●
             s●eepie
             dogg
             
          
           
             ●0
             .
             Benefit
             ,
             care
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Christ.
             
          
           
             August
             .
             Hier●●
             .